• Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar
The Little Ferraro Kitchen logo
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Mediterranean Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Cookbooks
  • About
  • Contact
search icon
Homepage link
  • Mediterranean Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Cookbooks
  • About
  • Contact
×
Home » Recipes

Blog

Seared Salmon with Lemon Herb Pearl Couscous

Feb 16, 2026 · 6 Comments

Salmon with lemon pearl couscous.

Perfectly seared salmon is served over chewy pearl couscous with sweet pops of corn and peas, all tossed in a bright lemon herb dressing. It’s a simple one-pan Mediterranean dinner that’s fresh, vibrant and one you’ll want on repeat!

Seared salmon over perl couscous with a bright lemon and herb vinaigrette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

If you love simple weeknight Mediterranean dinners, you will absolutely love this seared salmon with lemon pearl couscous. The salmon is cooked until lightly charred on the outside and perfectly tender in the center, then served over chewy pearl couscous with sweet pops of corn and peas throughout.

Everything is tossed in a bright lemon herb vinaigrette that brings all of those fresh, vibrant flavors together. And the best part is that the couscous is cooked in the same pan as the salmon, soaking up all of that savory flavor.

Pearl couscous, also known as Israeli couscous, isn’t actually couscous at all. It’s a small toasted pasta that becomes perfectly tender and chewy as it cooks and absorbs broth beautifully. It’s one of my favorite pantry staples because it pairs well with just about anything, from seafood and chicken to roasted vegetables.

If you’re looking for more inspiration, try my One Pot Pearl Couscous with Chicken and Saffron or Roasted Vegetables with Pearl Couscous.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for salmon with pearl couscous including lemon, peas, corn and aromatics.
  • Salmon:  Look for thicker center-cut fillets, if possible, since thinner pieces can overcook. I like to keep the skin on, so it holds the filet well, or you can remove the skin before or after cooking if you prefer.
  • Pearl Couscous: Also called Israeli couscous, this is a small pasta made from semolina that becomes tender and chewy as it cooks. Unlike traditional couscous, which is very fine, pearl couscous holds its shape and absorbs broth beautifully, making it perfect for one-pan meals.
  • Corn and Peas: Frozen corn kernels and peas keep this recipe simple and weeknight-friendly. They warm quickly and add sweetness and color. In the summer, fresh grilled corn would be a fabulous addition.
  • Lemon Herb Dressing:  A simple mix of fresh lemon juice, olive oil, Dijon mustard, and chopped parsley. The warm couscous absorbs the dressing, making every bite bright and flavorful.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

Have fun customizing. This recipe is incredibly versatile.

  • Switch up the Veggies: Instead of peas, try fava beans, edamame, or even chopped green beans.
  • Add more Vegetables: Roasted zucchini, cherry tomatoes, or sautéed spinach.
  • Finish with Cheese: Crumbled feta cheese is a delicious finishing touch.
  • Change the Herbs: Swap parsley for basil, dill, or mint, or use a combination of herbs.
  • Other Seafood Options: Instead of salmon, try shrimp, cod, or halibut.

⏲️ Instructions

Once the salmon filets are seared, set them aside and cover with foil to keep warm.

Sear the Salmon: Cook the salmon until lightly charred on the outside and tender in the center, then set aside while you prepare the couscous.

Toast the pearl couscous in the pan for a minute.

Toast the Pearl Couscous: After sautéing the shallot and garlic, toast the couscous for 2-3 minutes.

Add stock to the toasted pearl couscous and bring to a simmer.

Add Stock: Pour in the broth, cover and bring to a simmer. Cook for about 10 minutes until liquid has absorbed.

Once the pearl couscous is cooked and tender, add the corn and peas and toss to combine.

Stir in the Peas and Corn: Add the vegetables during the last few minutes so they stay bright and sweet.

Make a simple lemon vinaigrette by mixing olive oil, dijon mustard, fresh lemon juice and chopped parsley.

Make the Lemon Dressing: Whisk together fresh lemon juice, olive oil, Dijon mustard and herbs. Drizzle over couscous and toss to combine.

Serve the seared salmon over the pearl couscous with corn and peas.

Assemble and Serve: Top the couscous with the seared salmon and serve with charred lemon wedges and additional chopped parsley.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Pat the Salmon Dry: Use paper towels to gently pat the salmon dry. This helps the seasoning stick and ensures the salmon sears properly instead of steaming.
  • Check for Bones: Run your fingers over the salmon and remove any pin bones, or ask your fishmonger to do this for you.
  • Start Skin-Side Down: Searing the salmon skin-side down first creates crispy skin and helps the fillet hold its shape.
  • Don’t Move the Salmon Too Soon: Let it cook until it releases easily from the pan before flipping. A flexible fish spatula works well for this.
  • Toast the Pearl Couscous: Toasting the couscous for a minute before adding the liquid adds a slightly nutty flavor.
  • Be Generous with the Dressing: Pearl couscous absorbs flavor well, so don’t be shy with the lemon herb dressing.
Serve the seared salmon alongside pearl couscous tossed with peas, corn and lemon vinaigrette.

Serving Suggestions

Salmon with pearl couscous is a complete meal on its own, but here are a few additions to round it out.

  • Garnish with crumbled feta cheese or extra lemon dressing drizzled on top.
  • Serve with charred lemon wedges.
  • Add a dollop of tzatziki sauce.
  • Serve alongside a chopped tomato and cucumber salad.

More Salmon Recipes to Try

  • A simple salmon curry with with strong Thai flavors of ginger, galangal and lemongrass. Serve with basmati rice for a flavorful and quick weeknight dinner.
    Salmon Curry with Lemongrass and Galangal
  • Fresh herb roasted salmon.
    Herb Crusted Salmon
  • Grilled cedar plank salmon topped with a creamy dill sauce and lemon.
    Cedar Plank Salmon with Creamy Dill Sauce
  • Healthy Greek salmon salad with fresh dill and mint.
    Greek Salmon Salad with Red Wine Vinaigrette

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Salmon with lemon pearl couscous.
Print Recipe
5 from 9 votes

Seared Salmon with Lemon Pearl Couscous

Seared salmon served over lemon herb pearl couscous with sweet corn and peas. A fresh, vibrant Mediterranean weeknight dinner that’s easy and full of flavor.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: salmon with Israeli couscous, salmon with lemon pearl couscous, salmon with pearl couscous
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 716kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $25

Equipment

  • Fish Spatula
  • skillet
  • rubber spatula

Ingredients

For the salmon and couscous

  • 4 salmon fillets about 5-6 ounces each
  • Kosher salt and black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more if needed
  • 1 small shallot finely chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves minced
  • 1 ½ cups pearl couscous
  • 2 cups vegetable stock
  • ½ cup frozen peas
  • ½ cup frozen corn

For the lemon herb dressing

  • 3 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh parsley
  • Kosher salt and black pepper to taste

For serving

  • Charred lemon wedges
  • Extra chopped parsley
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Sear the salmon. Season the salmon with salt and pepper. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the salmon and cook 3–4 minutes per side, until lightly charred and cooked through. Transfer to a plate and set aside.
  • Sauté the aromatics. In the same pan, add more oil if needed and sauté the shallot for 2–3 minutes until softened, then add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds until fragrant.
  • Toast the couscous. Add the pearl couscous and toast for 2–3 minutes, stirring often, until lightly golden.
  • Cook the couscous. Pour in the stock and bring to a gentle boil. Reduce heat, cover, and simmer for 10 minutes, or until the couscous is tender and most of the liquid is absorbed.
  • Add the vegetables. Stir in the peas and corn during the last 2–3 minutes of cooking to warm through.
  • Make the dressing. Whisk together the lemon juice, olive oil, Dijon, parsley, salt, and pepper.
  • Finish and serve. Remove the couscous from heat and toss with the lemon herb dressing. Fluff and adjust seasoning as needed. Serve with the seared salmon on top and charred lemon wedges.

Notes

  • Toast the couscous: Toasting adds extra flavor and helps the couscous stay pleasantly chewy.
  • Use broth for more flavor: Cooking the couscous in stock makes a big difference compared to water.
  • Add the dressing off heat: Tossing the lemon dressing at the end keeps the flavors bright and fresh.
  • Taste before serving: Adjust salt, lemon, and herbs right before serving for the best balance.
  • Char the lemons: This adds subtle sweetness and depth to the finished dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 716kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 19g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 571mg | Potassium: 1106mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 776IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 3mg

One Pot Lemon Chicken and Rice with Chickpeas

Feb 13, 2026 · 25 Comments

One pot chicken with rice and chickpeas is seasoned with bold spices and layered with fresh lemon slices.

This one pot Mediterranean chicken and rice is layered with bold spices, tender rice and chickpeas that soak up every bit of flavor! Finished with fresh lemon slices and herbs, it’s an easy and deeply flavorful weeknight dinner.

This Mediterranean chicken and rice is made in one pot and layered with bold spices, chickpeas and lemon.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This one pot Mediterranean chicken and rice is layered with bold flavors and made entirely in one pan! Bone in chicken thighs are deeply seasoned with a blend of Mediterranean spices, and once seared, they finish cooking in the same pot with fragrant basmati rice and nutty chickpeas.

If you are looking to dive into Mediterranean cooking, this is the recipe to start with! It uses pantry staples, with layers of warm and bright flavors and doable for a weeknight.

Pair this one pot chicken dish with chopped salad or homemade tzatziki sauce for a true explosion of flavors!

🍋 Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Bold Mediterranean flavors! Cumin, paprika, bright sumac and fresh lemon zest season the chicken thighs and the flavor combination is delicious!
  • Bone in and skin on chicken thighs ensure that the chicken stays juicy and tender!
  • This one pot chicken and rice is done in nearly 40 minutes!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for one pot chicken with rice and chickpeas, including Mediterranen spices, shallot, garlic and lemon.
  • Chicken Thighs: Bone in and skin on chicken thighs have more fat and flavor than chicken breast. When baked in the oven with other grains, the chicken stays juicy and tender and won't dry out.
  • Spices: A mixture of Mediterranean spices including paprika, turmeric, sumac, cumin and a touch of warm allspice bring big flavors to this simple one pot recipe.
  • Fresh Lemon: Both the lemon zest and lemon slices are used in this recipe to offer a bit of brightness to the warmer flavors. Use a microplane to grate the lemon zest.
  • Garlic and Shallot: Shallots are a little milder than onion and offer great flavor. If shallots aren't available, substitute with finely chopped red onion.
  • Basmati Rice: The grains of basmati rice are long and fragrant. If you are looking for a truly delicious and airy basmati rice, my favorite is India Gate Basmati Rice.
  • Chickpeas: A simple can of chickpeas is drained and rinsed and added to the one pot chicken recipe. The chickpeas stay tender and the outside gets ever so crunchy.
  • Chicken Stock: I like using a chicken stock base, such as this one or use your favorite chicken or vegetable stock. If stock isn't available, use water.

🌶️ Substitutions and Variations

  • Chicken Options: Boneless chicken thighs and drumsticks work well, just reduce the cooking time slightly. If using boneless, skinless chicken breasts, increase the liquid to about 2½–2¾ cups and consider slicing the breasts in half horizontally to prevent drying out.
  • Beans: If chickpeas aren’t available, canned white beans (such as cannellini or great northern beans) are a great substitute.
  • Spices: If you don’t have the full spice blend, cumin, paprika, and turmeric alone will still give you excellent flavor.
  • Vegetable Additions: Stir in baby spinach at the end, or add cubed zucchini before baking.
  • Heat: Add a teaspoon of harissa, Aleppo pepper, or chili flakes if you like a little spice.

⏲️ Instructions

Sear the spiced chicken thighs on both sides until the skin is deeply seared.

Sear the Chicken: Season the chicken generously, then sear skin-side down until deeply golden. Flip and cook briefly on the other side, then remove from the pan.

Add the drained chickpeas to the toasted rice.

Toast the Rice & Chickpeas: In the same pan, sauté the aromatics, then stir in the basmati rice and chickpeas.

Pour chicken stock around the chicken, making sure the chicken skin stays dry.

Layer & Add Stock: Nestle the seared chicken on top of the rice and chickpeas. Pour the stock around the chicken and scatter lemon slices over the top.

Cook the one pot chicken and rice until the chicken is cooked through and liquid has absorbed.

Bake and Garnish:: Cover and transfer to the oven and bake for 20 minutes, then uncover and continue cooking for 10 more minutes, until the liquid is absorbed and the chicken is cooked through. Garnish with fresh parsley, and serve.

📍Recipe Tips

  • Dry the Chicken First: Patting the chicken dry helps the spices stick and ensures a deeply golden, crispy skin when seared.
  • Start Skin-Side Down: Searing the chicken skin-side down renders fat that becomes the flavor base for sautéing the aromatics and rice.
  • Rinse the Rice: Rinsing the rice removes excess starch, making a lighter and airier result.
  • Toast the Rice: Briefly sautéing the dry rice in the rendered chicken fat adds another layer of flavor before the liquid is added.
  • Pour Stock Around the Chicken: Pouring the stock around (not over) the chicken helps keep the skin crisp.
  • Extra Crispy Skin: For even crispier skin, place under the broiler for 2–3 minutes at the end, just keep a close eye on it.
This one pot chicken and rice is layered with bold Mediterranean spices, chickpeas and fresh lemon.

Serving Suggestions

  • Creamy tzatziki or lemony herb tahini sauce
  • A spoonful of harissa or chili paste for heat
  • Chopped Mediterranean salad or fattoush salad for crunch
  • Simple roasted vegetables or steamed greens on the side

More Flavorful Chicken Recipes to Try

  • Spanish inspired chicken stew with olives and potatoes.
    Spanish Chicken Stew
  • This easy chicken puttanesca recipe has seared chicken in a savory tomato sauce with olives and capers.
    Chicken Puttanesca with Olives and Capers
  • This flavorful chicken tagine is layered with preserved lemons, olives, dried apricots and an array of bold spices.
    Chicken Tagine with Preserved Lemons and Olives
  • One pot chicken Provencal with white wine and olives.
    One Pot Chicken Provencal

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

One pot chicken with rice and chickpeas is seasoned with bold spices and layered with fresh lemon slices.
Print Recipe
5 from 22 votes

One Pot Lemon Chicken and Rice with Chickpeas

A flavorful and easy one pot chicken and rice recipe that is seasoned with bold Mediterranean spices, chickpeas and fresh lemon.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: lemon chicken and rice, one pot chicken and rice, one pot lemon chicken and rice, one pot mediterranean chicken and rice
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 786kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Microplane
  • Meat Thermometer
  • Dutch Oven Braiser

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds chicken thighs skin on and bone in
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon Ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon allspice
  • 1 lemon zested and sliced thinly
  • Olive oil for drizzling
  • 1 small shallot diced
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 cup uncooked basmati rice rinsed
  • 15 ounce can chickpeas drained and rinsed
  • 2-2 ½ cups chicken broth
  • Fresh parsley chopped, for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the Oven: Preheat the oven to 400°F.
  • Season the Chicken: In a small bowl, mix together the spices, lemon zest, salt, and pepper. Pat the chicken thighs very dry with paper towels, then season generously on all sides.
  • Sear the Chicken: Heat a wide Dutch oven or braiser over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Sear the chicken skin-side down until deeply golden, about 3–4 minutes, then flip and cook the other side for 2 minutes. Remove chicken to a plate.
  • Build the Flavor Base: In the same pan, sauté the shallots until softened and lightly caramelized, about 2–3 minutes. Add the garlic and sauté for 1–2 minutes until fragrant.
  • Toast the Rice: Add the basmati rice and stir to coat the grains in the rendered chicken fat. Add the chickpeas and cook for 1 minute, stirring to combine.
  • Assemble the Dish: Nestle the chicken thighs back into the rice mixture, skin-side up. Pour the chicken broth around the chicken (not over it) and scatter the lemon slices on top.
  • Bake: Turn off the stovetop heat, cover the pot, and transfer to the oven. Bake for 20 minutes, then uncover and continue cooking for 10 more minutes, until the liquid is absorbed and the chicken is cooked through.
  • Finish and Serve: Remove from the oven, garnish with fresh parsley, and serve warm.

Notes

  • Pat the chicken dry before seasoning to help the spices stick and achieve crisp skin.
  • Searing the chicken skin-side down renders flavorful fat that seasons the entire dish.
  • Rinse basmati rice until the water runs clear for a lighter, fluffier result.
  • Briefly toasting the rice in the pan adds depth and improves texture. Pour the broth around the chicken to help keep the skin crisp.
  • For extra-crispy skin, place the uncovered pan under the broiler for 2–3 minutes, watching closely.

Nutrition

Calories: 786kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 47g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 225mg | Sodium: 1493mg | Potassium: 791mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 454IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 4mg

Classic Cioppino (Seafood and Tomato Stew)

Feb 3, 2026 · 4 Comments

This cioppino recipe is full of abundant seafood with clams, mussels and lobster in a flavorful tomato broth.

This robust cioppino is a bold, rustic Italian-American seafood stew simmered with tomatoes, fennel and loads of fresh seafood! Grab the crusty bread, because this is the kind of dish you'll want to scoop up every last drop.

Cioppino is a hearty Italian-American seafood stew with clams, mussels, shrimp and lobster served with crusty bread for dipping.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Cioppino is a classic Italian-American fisherman's stew that's traditionally made with whatever fresh seafood is available. Originating in San Francisco, this robust seafood stew is hearty, rustic and built around a flavorful tomato base that's flavored with garlic, herbs and white wine.

My version leans into bold Mediterranean flavors with sautéed fennel, a bundle of fresh herbs and a mix of shellfish and tender fish fillets. The addition of lobster tails makes this seafood stew a bit more luxurious, but at its heart, it's a savory and rustic one pot seafood stew that's a true showstopper!

📋 Ingredients

Cioppino ingredients including fennel, white wine, halibut, clams and mussels, crushed tomatoes and aromatics.
  • Fennel: One of my favorite vegetables with seafood. When sautéed, fennel becomes sweet and pairs nicely with tomatoes, seafood and white wine. Use the fennel bulb for cooking and save the fronds for garnish.
  • Shallot: I prefer shallot for its mild and slightly sweet flavor, which blends well with the fennel and tomatoes. If shallot is not available, substitute with a sweet yellow onion or red onion.
  • Herb Bundle: Fresh thyme, oregano, bay leaf and parsley are tied together and simmered in the tomato seafood broth. This infuses the seafood stew with an herbaceous aroma without overpowering.
  • Seafood Stock: A good seafood stock deepens the overall flavor. Homemade seafood stock is a fantastic choice (save those shells to make your own), or use clam juice or even vegetable stock.
  • Seafood: Use a variety of seafood that looks freshest and what you enjoy most. Fresh seafood should smell clean and briny like the ocean and never “fishy.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Different Seafood: The great thing about cioppino is how versatile it is.
    • Instead of halibut, add salmon (will have a stronger flavor) or cod.
    • Scallops, calamari and crab legs are all fabulous additions as well. Be sure to add scallops and calamari in the final 4-5 minutes.
  • All Shellfish: Make the cioppino entirely shellfish with with clams, mussels, shrimp and crab.
  • Saffron (optional): A small pinch of saffron added to the tomato base gives the stew a lovely aromatic flavor.
  • Frozen Seafood: Frozen seafood works really well! Thaw completely and pat dry before adding to the stew.

How to Layer Seafood for Cioppino

One of the keys to a great cioppino is adding the seafood in stages. Not all seafood cooks at the same rate and layering ensures everything finishes cooking at the same time.

  1. Lobster tails go in first and simmer for about 2 minutes.
    • As a general rule, lobster tails need about 1 minute of cooking time per ounce.
  2. Clams and mussels are added next, then cover the pot and cook for about 3 minutes, until they just begin to open.
  3. Halibut is gently nestled into the broth and simmers for 3-4 minutes.
  4. Prawns or shrimp go in last and cook for the final 3-4 minutes, until pink and just cooked through.

Total seafood cooking time is roughly 10 minutes and at this point, everything should be finished at the same time.

⏲️ Instructions

Saute sliced fennel, shallot and garlic.

Build the Flavor Base: Sauté sliced fennel, shallot and garlic in olive oil until fragrant and lightly softened.

Saute the tomato paste with the fennel, until it paste deepens in color.

Bloom the Tomato Paste: Stir in tomato paste and red pepper flakes, cooking until deep red and aromatic.

After the fennel and tomato paste is sautéed, add wine and reduce.

Reduce the Wine: Pour in white wine and simmer until reduced by half.

Add the herb bundle to the cioppino base.

Add Tomatoes & Herb Bundle: Stir in crushed tomatoes, seafood stock, and nestle in the herb bundle.

Simmer the tomato cioppino base for about 30 minutes before adding the seafood in.

Simmer the Broth: Gently simmer for 20–30 minutes until the broth deepens in color and flavor.

Layer the mussels and clams into the cioppino after you add the lobster tails.

Add Lobster and Shellfish: Add lobster tails and simmer for 2-3 minutes. Then add the clams & mussels and simmer for 3 minutes.

Nestle in the halibut fillets a few minutes after the clams and mussels start cooking in the cioppino.

Add Halibut: Nestle the seasoned halibut fillets on top and simmer for 3-4 minutes.

Simmer everything until cioppino is done and seafood is perfectly cooked.

Add Prawns and Finish: Cook shrimp for the final 2–3 minutes, until pink and just cooked through. Once done, garnish with fresh herbs.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Clean Shellfish Properly: Clams and mussels should be thoroughly cleaned to remove grit and sand before cooking Here are a few step-by-step guides:
    • How to Clean Clams
    • How to Clean Mussels
  • Keep a Gentle Simmer: Once the seafood goes in, keep the stew at a gentle simmer, not a rolling boil. High heat can cook the fish too quickly, making it tough and overcooking the shellfish.
  • Shellfish Timing: If clams and mussels begin to open early, remove them from the pot and add them back at the end, so they don’t overcook.
  • Discard Unopened Shellfish: Discard any mussels or clams that have not opened or ones that have broken or cracked shells.

🥡 Make Ahead and Leftovers

  • The tomato base can be made ahead and refrigerated for up to 2 days. Add the seafood right before serving.
  • To Reheat Leftovers:
    • Remove seafood from the shells.
    • Cut the larger pieces into bite-sized chunks.
    • Gently reheat the leftover seafood in the broth over low heat.

Leftover cioppino is fantastic tossed with pasta, spooned over rice or served with even more crusty bread.

Cioppino is an Italian-American seafood stew with loads of fresh seafood in a fennel tomato broth.

What To Serve with Cioppino

  • Plenty of toasted crusty bread to sop up the delicious sauce.
  • A crisp white wine like Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio.
  • A simple and fresh fennel citrus salad.
  • Add cioppino to a Feast of the Seven Fishes spread.

More Seafood Recipes to Try

  • Seafood pasta with mussels, clams and shrimp.
    Seafood Pasta with Mussels, Clams and Shrimp
  • Seafood and chorizo paella is full of Pacific Northwest clams and mussels, wild salmon, spicy chorizo and garnished with sweet peas and bright lemon.
    Seafood and Chorizo Paella
  • Coconut curry mussels in a creamy coconut broth with fresh lime as garnish.
    Thai Coconut Curry Mussels
  • Recipe for halibut piccata with white wine, butter and capers.
    Halibut Piccata

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This cioppino recipe is full of abundant seafood with clams, mussels and lobster in a flavorful tomato broth.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Cioppino (Italian Seafood and Tomato Stew)

This classic cioppino is a rustic Italian-American seafood stew with tomatoes, fennel and loads of fresh seafood!
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time55 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 25 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Italian, Mediterranean
Keyword: cioppino, cioppino stew, seafood and tomato stew, seafood stew
Servings: 6
Calories: 230kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $20

Equipment

  • Shellfish Scrubber
  • Dutch Oven
  • rubber spatula
  • Chef Knife

Ingredients

Cioppino Base

  • Olive oil for sautéing
  • 1 fennel bulb thinly sliced
  • 1 shallot thinly sliced
  • 4 garlic cloves thinly sliced
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 cup dry white wine
  • 28 ounce can crushed tomatoes
  • 4 cups seafood stock
  • Kosher salt & black pepper

Herb Bundle

  • 4-5 stems fresh oregano
  • 4-5 stems of parsley
  • 4-5 stems fresh thyme
  • 1 bay leaf

Seafood

  • 2 lobster tails 6 ounces each
  • 8 ounces halibut cut into large chunks
  • 8-10 head-on shell-on prawns
  • 1 pound clams scrubbed
  • 1 pound mussels scrubbed

For Garnish

  • Chopped parsley
  • Fennel fronds
  • Crusty bread for serving
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Sauté the aromatics: Heat olive oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add fennel and shallot and cook until softened, 6-8 minutes. Add sliced garlic and cook for another minute
  • Build the tomato base: Stir in red pepper flakes and tomato paste. Cook until the paste deepens in color, about 1 minute.
  • Deglaze with wine: Pour in the white wine and simmer until reduced by about half.
  • Simmer the broth: Add the crushed tomatoes, seafood stock and herb bundle. Bring to a gentle simmer and cook uncovered for 20–30 minutes. Season with salt and pepper.
  • Layer the seafood:
    Add lobster tails first and simmer 2 minutes.
    Add clams and mussels, cover, and cook 3–4 minutes.
    Nestle halibut on top, lightly seasoned, and simmer 4–5 minutes
    Add prawns and cook for the last 3–4 minutes, until pink and shellfish are open.
  • Finish & serve: Remove herb bundle. Discard any shellfish that did not open. Garnish with parsley and fennel fronds. Serve with crusty bread.

Video

Notes

  • Cleaning Shellfish: Scrub clams and mussels thoroughly before cooking. Here are helpful guides on cleaning them. 
    • How to clean mussels
    • How to clean clams
  • Gentle Simmer: Keep the cioppino at a gentle simmer, never a rolling boil, to prevent tough seafood.
  • Lobster Timing: Lobster tails cook about 1 minute per ounce. Avoid overcooking.
  • Frozen Seafood Tip: Fully thaw seafood in the refrigerator and pat dry before using.

Nutrition

Calories: 230kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 76mg | Sodium: 1068mg | Potassium: 1163mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 720IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 181mg | Iron: 5mg

How to Clean Mussels

Jan 28, 2026 · Leave a Comment

Use this guide to learn how to clean fresh mussels for cooking.

Whether you're steaming, simmering or adding them to pasta, properly cleaning mussels is the key to a great final dish. This step-by-step guide teaches you how to clean mussels like a pro, so they're grit-free and ready for any recipe!

Keep the cleaned mussels in a bowl full of ice until you are ready to cook them.

Mussels are one of my favorite seafood dishes, and over the years, I've cleaned more than I can count. In this simple step-by-step guide, you'll learn how to clean mussels like a pro, with tips that guarantee clean, grit-free mussels every time!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🛒 What to Look for When Buying Mussels

Always start with live and fresh mussels. Here's what to look for when at the seafood counter.

  • Smell: Fresh mussels should smell clean and briny, like the ocean. Never fishy.
  • Shells: Mussel shells should be tightly closed or they should close slowly when gently tapped. Avoid mussels with cracked or broken shells.
  • Storage: Mussels should be kept on ice and ideally sold in a mesh bag, which allows them to breathe.
  • Ask Your Fishmonger: Don't be shy! Ask them when the mussels were delivered. Same day or day before is best.

📍 Pro Tip: Plan to buy mussels the same day you plan to cook them, whenever possible.

🧊 Bringing Mussels Home

Once you come home with your fresh mussels, immediately take them out of the bag and put them in a large bowl over ice and keep them in the refrigerator.

🧽 How to Clean Mussels

Cleaning mussels takes longer than it does to cook them, but it's absolutely worth it!

Soak the Mussels

  • Place the mussels in a large bowl of ice-cold water in the sink.
  • Sprinkle in a generous amount of Kosher salt and let them soak for about 20-30 minutes.
    • This step encourages the mussels to release any sand or grit trapped inside the shells.
Once the fresh mussels are in a bowl of ice cold water, add a good amount of Kosher salt and let them soak for 30 minutes.
  • After soaking, the water will look dirty. Make sure to lift the mussels out of the water so you don't pour the dirty water over them.
After soaking and cleaning the mussels, the water will look dirty.

Scrub and Debeard the Mussels

Mussels naturally cling to rocks and other surfaces in the ocean using strong fibrous beards. Scrubbing helps ensure there is no debris in the final dish.

  • Remove each mussel from the cold water and use a soft-bristled shellfish brush to scrub each one, which removes any exterior debris or dirt.
Use a shellfish scrubber to scrub each mussel and remove any exterior debris.
  • Remove the beard. Most mussels have a fibrous piece that sticks out from the shell. Hold the mussel in one hand and use your fingers in the other hand to pull the beard firmly toward the hinge of the shell (a towel or glove can help with grip.) Discard the beards.
Most mussels have a beard on them, make sure to remove this before cooking the mussels.

📍 Tip: If a mussel won't close when gently tapped or feels light, discard it.

💧 Final Rinse and Hold on Ice

Once all the mussels are debearded and clean, give them one final rinse.

Place the mussels in a bowl of ice and keep them in the fridge until you're ready to cook them. At this point, your mussels are clean and ready for any recipe.

⏲️ How Long Do Mussels Take to Cook?

The good news is that mussels cook fast!

Once you add the mussels to your recipe, they are ready in about 5-7 minutes. Once the shells open, they are done. Discard any mussels that remain closed.

🍝 Recipes to Use Cleaned Mussels

Once your mussels are clean and ready to go, try them in:

  • Mussels in White Wine Sauce
  • Mussels Marinara
  • Seafood Pasta
  • Thai Coconut Curry Mussels
  • Bouillabaisse
Use this guide to learn how to clean fresh mussels for cooking.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

How to Clean Mussels

Learn how to clean mussels step by step-with-easy tips that guarantee clean, grit-free mussels every time.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Soaking30 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Main
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: how to clean fresh mussels, how to clean mussels
Servings: 2 servings
Calories: 398kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Shellfish Scrubber
  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds fresh mussels
  • Cold water
  • Kosher salt
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Check the Mussels: Discard any mussels with cracked shells or those that do not close when lightly tapped.
  • Soak the Mussels: Place the mussels in a large bowl of ice-cold water. Sprinkle generously with salt and let soak for 20–30 minutes to help purge any sand or grit.
  • Scrub and Debeard: Drain the mussels and rinse briefly. Using a shellfish brush, scrub each mussel under cold running water to remove debris.
  • Remove the beard by pulling it firmly toward the hinge of the shell and discard.
  • Final Rinse: Give the cleaned mussels a final rinse and keep them on fresh ice in the refrigerator until ready to cook.

Notes

  • Buy mussels the same day you plan to cook them for the best flavor and freshness.
  • Fresh mussels should smell clean and briny, never fishy.
  • Mussels should be stored on ice and able to breathe.
  • Not all mussels have beards, but check each one just in case.
  • If a mussel feels unusually light or won’t close when tapped, discard it.
  • Cleaning mussels takes longer than cooking them. Most mussels cook in 5–7 minutes once added to a hot pot.
  • Any mussels that do not open after cooking should be discarded.

Nutrition

Calories: 398kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 55g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 130mg | Sodium: 1323mg | Potassium: 1481mg | Vitamin A: 740IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 120mg | Iron: 18mg

Mussels in White Wine Sauce

Jan 26, 2026 · 13 Comments

Mussels mariniere recipe from Julia Child.

Mussels in White Wine Sauce is a classic seafood recipe made with fresh mussels that are steamed with garlic, shallots and herbs. Inspired by Julia Child's moules marinière, this simple and elegant dish comes together in minutes.

Mussels mariniere are steamed mussels flavored with herbs, butter, garlic and shallot.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌿 About This Recipe

Mussels in white wine sauce is a classic seafood recipe made with fresh mussels that are gently steamed in a light, buttery garlic and white wine broth. It’s simple, elegant and comes together quickly!

This recipe is strongly inspired by Julia Child’s famous moules marinière from Mastering the Art of French Cooking. This version stays true to the original, keeping every bite buttery, briny and beautifully simple. And that’s why white wine mussels continue to be my annual birthday request!

If you love this style of simple seafood, be sure to try my Clams in White Wine Sauce, which is another reader favorite made with the same bright, buttery sauce.

French mussels mariniere recipe served with bread for dipping.
"Learn how to cook -- try new recipes, learn from your mistakes, be fearless and above all have fun."- Julia Child

📋 Ingredients

  • Mussels: Look for fresh mussels without any cracks on the shell. Mussels should be cooked the same day they are purchased and always kept cold.
  • Shallot: Shallots are mild and slightly sweet and give the mussels delicious flavor. If shallots aren't available, you could substitute with finely chopped red onion or chives.
  • White Wine: Use a dry white wine such as Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Gris.
  • Herbs: Bay leaf, parsley and thyme steep in the wine and butter sauce and bring a fresh and simple layer of flavor.
  • Butter: Mussels can be salty as is, so I suggest using unsalted butter to control the amount of salt in the mussels recipe.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🧅 Variations

  • Make it creamy: Add a splash of heavy cream or a dollop of crème fraîche at the end for a richer sauce.
  • Add Dijon: Whisk in 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard for a classic French-style finish.
  • Swap the aromatics: Instead of shallots, add ½ of a sliced leek and sauté for 5 minutes before adding the butter and wine.
  • Brighten it up: Finish the sauce with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice for a lighter, brighter flavor.

💦 How to Clean Mussels Before Cooking

Now before we get into the steaming, let's talk about how to properly clean mussels first. Honestly, it takes longer to clean mussels than to cook them, but it's worth it so you don't bite into a hard piece of sand.

Place Mussels on Ice. Once you bring home the mussels, place them on ice and chill in the fridge until you're ready to cook (usually on the same day).

Place the fresh mussels on ice to keep cold before cooking.

Debeard the Mussels. If you haven't worked with mussels before, it's pretty easy. Each mussel comes with a little "beard". Pull that out (it may be a bit hard at first).

Pull the thick beard off of each fresh mussel.

Soak and scrub the mussels. 30 minutes before you're ready to cook, place the mussels in a large bowl of cold water with a bit of Kosher salt. This helps the mussels spit out any sand that may be inside.

Soak mussels in cold water so they can spit out any grit.

When you're ready to cook, use a shellfish brush and scrub the outside of each mussel. Then, you're ready to cook!

If you want a more detailed walkthrough, I share exactly how to clean mussels step by step here.

⏲️ Instructions

Simmer butter, shallots, wine, herbs and salt and pepper and bring to a boil.
  1. Start the Sauce: In a large pot or skillet over medium heat, add the butter, shallots, garlic, white wine, bay leaf, parsley, thyme, salt, and black pepper. Bring to a good simmer and let the wine reduce slightly, about 2-3 minutes.
  2. Steam the Mussels: Add the mussels to the pot, cover with a lid, and cook until the mussels just open, about 5-7 minutes. Discard any mussels that remain closed.
  3. Serve: Transfer the mussels to wide bowls. Ladle the white wine sauce over the top, garnish with chopped parsley, and serve immediately with crusty French bread for dipping.
French style mussels steamed with butter and herbs.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Mussels should smell fresh and briny and not have an unpleasant odor.
  • Cook mussels the same day they are purchased.
  • Discard any mussel shells that are broken or cracked and mussels that don't open after being cooked.
  • Mussels will give off some water when being steamed, which makes a great dunking sauce!

🍷 What to Serve with Mussels

  • Crusty Bread: Serve mussels with warm crusty French bread, baguette, or garlic focaccia to soak up every drop of the buttery white wine sauce.
  • Simple Salads: A crisp Nicoise salad, shaved fennel salad, or arugula with Parmesan pairs beautifully with the rich, buttery broth.
  • French-Style Sides: Try classic French fries (moules-frites), steamed baby potatoes with herbs, or a simple buttered green bean or asparagus on the side.
  • Wine Pairings: White wine mussels pair best with crisp, dry white wines that complement the briny seafood and buttery broth.
    • Sauvignon Blanc: Bright and citrusy, a classic pairing
    • Muscadet: The traditional French choice for moules marinière
    • Pinot Grigio: Light, clean, and refreshing
    • Dry Riesling or Albariño: Crisp with subtle minerality

Tip: Use the same wine for cooking and serving. If you enjoy drinking it, it’s perfect for the sauce.

🦀 More Shellfish Recipes

  • Steamed clams in white wine with garlic.
    Steamed Clams with White Wine and Garlic
  • Seafood and chorizo paella is full of Pacific Northwest clams and mussels, wild salmon, spicy chorizo and garnished with sweet peas and bright lemon.
    Seafood and Chorizo Paella
  • This cioppino recipe is full of abundant seafood with clams, mussels and lobster in a flavorful tomato broth.
    Classic Cioppino (Seafood and Tomato Stew)
  • Assemble the best seafood platter with chilled clams, oysters, seared tuna and crab legs.
    Chilled Seafood Platter

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Mussels mariniere recipe from Julia Child.
Print Recipe
4.83 from 35 votes

Mussels in White Wine Sauce

Mussels in white wine sauce is a classic seafood recipe with mussels steamed in a light and buttery garlic wine broth.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Soaking30 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Main Course
Cuisine: French
Keyword: French mussels, julia child mussels, Julia Child steamed mussels, moules mariniere, mussels in white wine sauce, mussels mariniere, white wine mussels
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 257kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Shellfish Scrubber
  • Chef Knife
  • skillet

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds mussels
  • Kosher salt for soaking mussels + more for seasoning
  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 shallot finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 1 cup white wine such as Sauvignon Blanc
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 4-5 parsley sprigs + more leaves for garnish
  • 4-5 thyme sprigs
  • ¼ teaspoon Ground black pepper
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Clean the Mussels: Scrub each mussel with a shellfish brush and remove the beard from each one. Place the mussels in a large bowl of cold water sprinkled with kosher salt, toss gently, and let soak for 20 minutes to release any sand.
  • Rinse and Drain: Use your hands to lift the mussels out of the soaking water and transfer them to a colander. Rinse well under cold running water, being careful not to pour the mussels directly into the colander so any sand left behind stays in the bowl.
  • Start the Sauce: In a large pot or skillet over medium heat, add the butter, shallots, garlic, white wine, bay leaf, parsley, thyme, salt, and black pepper. Bring to a good simmer and let the wine reduce slightly, about 2-3 minutes.
  • Steam the Mussels: Add the mussels to the pot, cover with a lid, and cook until the mussels just open, about 5-7 minutes. Discard any mussels that remain closed.
  • Serve: Transfer the mussels to wide bowls. Ladle the white wine sauce over the top, garnish with chopped parsley, and serve immediately with crusty French bread for dipping.

Notes

    • Mussels should smell fresh and briny and not have an unpleasant odor.
    • Cook mussels the same day they are purchased.
    • Discard any mussel shells that are broken or cracked and mussels that don't open after being cooked.
    • Mussels will give off some water when being steamed, which makes a great dunking sauce!

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 62mg | Sodium: 337mg | Potassium: 455mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 657IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 5mg

Moroccan Lentil Soup

Jan 24, 2026 · 2 Comments

This vegan Moroccan lentil soup is full of bold spices, hearty lentils and tender vegetables. Garnish with lemon and a drizzle of olive oil.

This Moroccan-inspired lentil soup is comforting, filling and full of warm, bold spices. Finished with fresh lemon and crisp sumac onions, it’s a hearty vegan soup that delivers serious flavor!

This Moroccan lentil soup is completely vegan, full of bold spices and tender vegetables.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This Moroccan-inspired lentil soup is all about warm spices and deep savory flavor, with a bright finish that brings it all together. Bold spices like cumin, ginger and cinnamon come together with vegetables, lentils and crushed tomatoes for a rich and hearty soup.

A final squeeze of lemon juice and a pile of sumac onions brings a pop of brightness to the soup that perfectly contrasts with the warm spices and lentils.

It’s an easy, weeknight-friendly soup that’s vegan, deliciously filling, and tastes even better the longer it sits!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for Moroccan lentil soup, including spices, crushed tomatoes, vegetable stock and aromatics.
  • Tomatoes: Canned crushed tomatoes work beautifully here, but chopped tomatoes, whole tomatoes that you crush yourself, or tomato purée all work just as well. In a pinch, even a simple tomato pasta sauce can be used.
  • Vegetable stock: Use a low-sodium stock to control the salt or follow my simple recipe for homemade vegetable stock. Chicken stock also works if you are not keeping this vegan.
  • Brown lentils: Brown lentils are ideal for this soup because they hold their shape as they cook.
  • Warm spices: This soup gets its depth from a blend of cumin, coriander, paprika, ginger, turmeric, and a small pinch of cinnamon. Together they create a warm, aromatic base that is bold but well balanced.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Tomatoes: Crushed tomatoes, chopped tomatoes, whole canned tomatoes, or tomato purée all work well. Use what you have on hand.
  • Spices: If you do not have every spice, focus on cumin, paprika, and a small pinch of cinnamon. Those three alone create a beautiful base.
  • Add-ins: For extra heartiness, add a can of drained chickpeas or white beans. For more greens, stir in chopped spinach or kale during the last few minutes of cooking.

⏲️ Instructions

Saute the warm spices with the vegetables as the base of the lentil soup.

Sauté the Base: Cook the onion, carrot, and celery in olive oil until softened, then stir in garlic, tomato paste, and spices and cook for another 30 seconds to 1 minute.

Add lentils and tomato sauce to the sautéed vegetables and start simmering the lentil soup.

Add the Lentils and Stock: Stir in the brown lentils, crushed tomatoes, and stock, making sure everything is well combined before bringing the soup to a simmer.

Continue simmering the Moroccan lentil soup until the lentils are tender and the soup has thickened.

Simmer Until Tender: Simmer the soup until the lentils are tender and the broth thickens.

Garnish the lentil soup with thinly sliced onion, herbs and a drizzle of olive oil.

Finish and Garnish: Ladle soup into bowls and garnish with fresh lemon juice, sumac onions, chopped cilantro, Aleppo pepper, and a drizzle of olive oil.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Give the vegetables a good head start. Let the onion, carrot, and celery soften slowly so they build a sweet, flavorful base. Cutting the celery on the smaller side creates a better texture in every bite.
  • Take time with the tomato paste and spices. Cook the tomato paste in the oil and bloom the spices to wake up the flavors.
  • Keep the soup at a steady simmer. Lentils need time to absorb the liquid, so be sure to keep it at a steady simmer and not a strong boil.
  • Finish with acid. Lentil soups love a bright finish. Fresh lemon juice, a splash of red wine vinegar, or tangy sumac onions make all the warm flavors pop.
  • This soup is perfect for making ahead. It tastes even better after a day or two in the fridge and freezes very well. It will thicken as it sits, so add a little extra stock when reheating.
Thsi spiced Moroccan lentil soup is vegan, hearty and full of bold flavors.

Serving Suggestions

This lentil soup is hearty enough on its own, but here are a few suggestions to add if desired.

  • Crusty bread or warm pita
  • Dollop of yogurt
  • Crisp fattoush salad
  • Lemon couscous to soak up the delicious broth
  • Grilled chicken skewers, if you are not keeping vegan

More Flavorful Soups to Try

  • Salmon with lemon pearl couscous.
    Seared Salmon with Lemon Herb Pearl Couscous
  • One pot chicken with rice and chickpeas is seasoned with bold spices and layered with fresh lemon slices.
    One Pot Lemon Chicken and Rice with Chickpeas
  • Use this guide to learn how to clean fresh mussels for cooking.
    How to Clean Mussels
  • Mussels mariniere recipe from Julia Child.
    Mussels in White Wine Sauce

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This vegan Moroccan lentil soup is full of bold spices, hearty lentils and tender vegetables. Garnish with lemon and a drizzle of olive oil.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Moroccan Lentil Soup

This Moroccan-inspired lentil soup is full of warm spices, tender lentils, and bright lemon for a hearty, comforting vegan meal with big flavor.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
55 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Soup
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Moroccan
Keyword: Moroccan lentil soup, vegan lentil soup, vegetarian lentil soup, vegetarian Moroccan lentil soup
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 229kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Chef Knife
  • Dutch Oven
  • rubber spatula

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil plus more for serving
  • 1 medium red onion diced
  • 2 carrots peeled and diced small
  • 2 celery stalks diced small
  • 4 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground ginger
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ⅛ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1 cup dried brown lentils rinsed
  • 1 cup crushed tomatoes
  • 5-6 cups vegetable or chicken stock
  • Kosher salt to taste
  • Fresh lemon juice to taste

Garnish

  • Sumac onions
  • Fresh chopped cilantro
  • Aleppo pepper
  • Extra-virgin olive oil
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Sauté the vegetables: Heat olive oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add onion, carrot, and celery and cook until softened and lightly golden, about 6–8 minutes.
  • Build the base: Add garlic and cook for 30 seconds until fragrant. Stir in tomato paste and cook for another 1-2 minutes, breaking it down into the oil until deep red and slightly caramelized.
  • Bloom the spices: Add cumin, coriander, paprika, ginger, turmeric, and cinnamon. Stir constantly for 30–60 seconds until fragrant.
  • Simmer the soup: Add lentils, crushed tomatoes, and stock. Bring to a gentle boil, then reduce to a simmer. Cover the pot with a lid, leaving a small opening and continue cooking for 40-45 minutes, until the lentils are tender.
  • Season and finish: Season with a good pinch of salt once lentils are tender. Stir in fresh lemon juice to taste.
  • Serve: Ladle into bowls and finish with sumac onions, chopped cilantro, a drizzle of olive oil, and a pinch of Aleppo pepper.

Notes

  • Build the Flavor: Cook the tomato paste and spices in the oil to deepen their flavor before adding any liquid.
  • Simmer Gently: Keep the soup at a steady simmer and taste the lentils as they cook. They should be tender all the way through.
  • Add More Liquid, if Needed: Lentils continue to absorb liquid as they cook, so add more stock or water if the soup becomes too thick.
  • Finish with Acid: A squeeze of lemon, a splash of vinegar, or tangy sumac onions at the end brighten the warm spices and bring the soup to life.
  • Make It Ahead: This soup tastes even better the next day and freezes well. Add a little extra stock when reheating if needed.

Nutrition

Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 898mg | Potassium: 619mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 4170IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 4mg

Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna

Jan 20, 2026 · 11 Comments

This lower-carb vegetarian zucchini lasagna is layered with lasagna sheets, zucchini slices, spinach and three cheeses.

This vegetarian zucchini lasagna is a lighter take on the classic, layered with tender zucchini, creamy herbed ricotta, and just enough pasta to hold it all together. It uses half the amount of lasagna sheets but still delivers all that savory, cheesy comfort you want from a great lasagna.

Vegetarian zucchini lasagna uses half the lasagna sheets and layers zucchini slices, spinach, marinara sauce and three cheeses.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This vegetarian zucchini lasagna is everything I want in a comforting, weeknight-friendly dinner. It’s flavorful, approachable, and just a little bit lighter than a traditional lasagna.

Instead of layering all the pasta, this lasagna uses just half a pound of lasagna sheets and fills the rest with thinly sliced zucchini, wilted spinach and a creamy and cheesy ricotta mixture with herbs and Parmesan cheese. Even though it’s a bit lighter, the lasagna is rich, cheesy and perfectly satisfying!

Serve it with a simple Arugula Parmesan Salad or a crisp Caesar Salad for a delicious meal.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for vegetarian zucchini lasagna, including lasagna sheets, spinach, mozzarella, ricotta and Parmesan cheese.
  • Lasagna Sheets: Use ½ pound lasagna sheets, cooked 1–2 minutes shy of the package directions so they finish cooking in the oven. You can also use no-boil sheets.
  • Zucchini: Look for firm zucchini with smooth skin and no blemishes. Slice thinly lengthwise (a mandolin helps) and give them a quick roast to remove excess moisture.
  • Ricotta Cheese: Use full-fat ricotta for the best texture. If you can find a basket ricotta or dry ricotta, even better. If your ricotta seems wet, strain it in a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl for 20–30 minutes to remove excess whey.
  • Spinach: Frozen spinach keeps this recipe even easier. Thaw the spinach completely, squeeze very dry, then measure about 1 cup after squeezing.
  • Mozzarella Cheese: Look for low-moisture mozzarella and if possible, shred the cheese yourself for the best melt and texture. Avoid fresh mozzarella that’s packed in brine, which can add too much moisture.
  • Marinara Sauce: Use your favorite jarred marinara to keep this recipe weeknight-friendly. Homemade sauce works too,  just let it cool before layering.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Use No-boil Lasagna Sheets: Add a little extra marinara between layers to ensure they cook through.
  • Add More Vegetables: Add thinly sliced and pre-roasted eggplant, sautéed mushrooms or roasted red peppers.
  • Swap the ricotta:
  • Cottage cheese works well and adds extra protein. Blend it for a smoother texture if desired.
  • Different Herbs: add roughly torn fresh basil to the ricotta mixture.
  • No fresh herbs? Use ½ teaspoon dried oregano or Italian seasoning.

⏲️ Instructions

Bake the zucchini slices for 10 minutes until they are pliable and slightly roasted.

Prepare the Zucchini: Bake seasoned and oiled zucchini slices at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes until just tender and some moisture has cooked off. Once done, set aside.

Mix the ricotta mixture for the zucchini lasagna. Combine ricotta cheese, one egg, fresh herbs and parmesan cheese and mix well.

Make the Ricotta Mixture: In a bowl, combine ricotta, egg, Parmesan, parsley, oregano, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper. Mix until smooth and well combined.

Spread a layer of ricotta on top of the cooked lasagna sheets for the vegetarian zucchini lasagna.

Assemble First Half of Lasagna: Spread a thin layer of marinara on the bottom. Add a layer of lasagna sheets, then spread ricotta mixture evenly on top. Scatter spinach over the ricotta, arrange a layer of zucchini slices, sprinkle with mozzarella, and spoon marinara over the top.

Layer the sliced zucchini on top of the spinach and ricotta layers.

Layer Second Half of Lasagna: Scatter spinach over the ricotta, arrange a layer of zucchini slices, sprinkle with mozzarella, and spoon marinara over the top. Repeat layers once more.

Once all the layers are done, scatter shredded mozzarella all over the top of the zucchini lasagna.

Final Layer of Lasagna: Finish with a final layer of lasagna sheets, the remaining marinara and top with the rest of the mozzarella, and a light sprinkle of Parmesan.

Bake the vegetarian lasagna until the cheese is melted and top is bubbly.

Bake: Cover with foil and bake for 25 minutes. Remove foil and bake another 15 minutes until bubbly. For extra browning, broil for 3 to 5 minutes, watching closely.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Cook Pasta Slightly Under: Boil the lasagna sheets 1–2 minutes shy of package directions, since they finish baking in the oven.
  • Squeeze the Spinach: Make sure to squeeze the thawed spinach dry remove as much moisture as possible.
  • Strain Wet Ricotta: If your ricotta is a bit on the wet side, drain it in a fine mesh sieve for 20–30 minutes for a thicker, creamier layer.
  • Shred your own mozzarella: Look for a log of low-moisture mozzarella from a block, which melts more smoothly than pre-shredded options.
  • Watch the broiler: If you finish under the broiler, keep a close eye on it! It can go from pale to burnt fast.
Vegetarian zucchini lasagna is a lower carb lasagna layering spinach, ricotta, mozzarella, pasta sheets and zucchini slices.

Serving Suggestions

Serve this spinach and zucchini lasagna with:

  • Classic Caesar Salad
  • Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad with Parmesan
  • Focaccia or Crusty Bread
  • Italian Charcuterie Board (great for entertaining)
  • Bread dipping Oil with Herbs (easy appetizer!)
  • Italian Peppers and Onions

More Vegetarian Recipes to Try

  • Easy one pot pasta recipe with sundried tomatoes and spinach and topped with parmesan cheese.
    One Pot Pasta with Spinach and Tomatoes
  • Butternut squash risotto with fried sage and Parmesan cheese.
    Butternut Squash Risotto with Crispy Sage
  • Vegetarian pasta fagioli recipe with pasta and beans and topped with grated Parmesan cheese and fresh herbs.
    Vegetarian Pasta Fagioli
  • Creamy and easy tomato mascarpone sauce with parmesan and fresh basil.
    Creamy Tomato Mascarpone Sauce with Pasta

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This lower-carb vegetarian zucchini lasagna is layered with lasagna sheets, zucchini slices, spinach and three cheeses.
Print Recipe
5 from 11 votes

Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna

A veggie-forward lasagna layered with tender zucchini, spinach, creamy herbed ricotta, and just enough pasta to hold it all together.
Prep Time25 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Cooling15 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 25 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Italian
Keyword: spinach and zucchini lasagna, spinach lasagna, vegetarian zucchini lasagna, zucchini lasagna
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 424kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls
  • Baking sheet
  • Mandolin

Ingredients

  • ½ pound lasagna sheets cooked 1–2 minutes shy of package directions
  • 24 oz jar marinara sauce
  • 2 medium sized zucchini sliced thin lengthwise
  • 10 oz frozen spinach thawed and squeezed very dry (about 1 cup after squeezing)
  • 15 oz whole-milk ricotta cheese
  • 1 large egg
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese plus more for topping
  • 2 –3 tablespoons finely chopped fresh parsley
  • 2 –3 tablespoons finely chopped fresh oregano
  • ¼ -½ teaspoon red pepper flakes or to taste
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 pound low-moisture mozzarella cheese freshly shredded
  • Olive oil for brushing zucchini
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Prepare the Zucchini: Preheat oven to 400°F. Arrange zucchini slices on a parchment-lined baking sheet. Lightly brush with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Roast for 10 minutes until just tender and some moisture has cooked off. Once done, set aside.
  • Make the Ricotta Mixture: In a bowl, combine ricotta, egg, Parmesan, parsley, oregano, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper. Mix until smooth and well combined.
  • Assemble the Lasagna: Lightly grease a 9x13-inch baking dish. Spread a thin layer of marinara on the bottom. Add a layer of lasagna sheets, then spread ricotta mixture evenly on top. Scatter spinach over the ricotta, arrange a layer of zucchini slices, sprinkle with mozzarella, and spoon marinara over the top.
  • Repeat layers once more.
  • Finish with a final layer of lasagna sheets, the remaining marinara, the rest of the mozzarella, and a light sprinkle of Parmesan.
  • Bake: Cover with foil and bake for 25 minutes. Remove foil and bake another 15 minutes until bubbly and lightly golden on top. For extra browning, broil for 3 to 5 minutes, watching closely.
  • Rest and Serve: Let the lasagna rest for 15 to 20 minutes before slicing. Finish with freshly grated Parmesan if desired.

Notes

  • Cook lasagna sheets slightly under since they will continue to cook in the oven.
  • Squeeze spinach very dry to prevent excess moisture in the lasagna.
  • If ricotta seems wet, strain it in a fine-mesh sieve for 20 to 30 minutes before using.
  • Use low-moisture mozzarella and shred it yourself for the best melting and texture.
  • No-boil lasagna sheets can be used. Add a little extra marinara between layers so they soften properly.

Nutrition

Calories: 424kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 100mg | Sodium: 941mg | Potassium: 716mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 5357IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 604mg | Iron: 2mg

Chicken Puttanesca with Olives and Capers

Jan 13, 2026 · 2 Comments

This easy chicken puttanesca recipe has seared chicken in a savory tomato sauce with olives and capers.

This chicken puttanesca is one of those recipes I come back to again and again on busy weeknights. It’s bold, briny, deeply savory, and made almost entirely from pantry staples. If you love olives, capers, anchovies, and a rich tomato sauce, this is the kind of dinner you’ll make on repeat!

This easy chicken puttanesca recipe layers seared chicken in a savory tomato sauce with olives and capers.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This chicken puttanesca is inspired by the classic linguine puttanesca but made heartier with bone-in, skin-on chicken thighs that gently simmer in the bold tomato sauce. The sauce is packed with olives, capers, garlic, anchovies, and a touch of heat, creating layers of savory flavor that taste like they’ve been cooking all day.

It’s an easy one-skillet chicken dinner that’s perfect for weeknights and flexible enough to adapt to what you have on hand. You can use canned tomatoes, fresh tomatoes, or even leftover marinara sauce. The flavors are salty, briny, and rich, making this a great option if you love big, Mediterranean-style flavors.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for chicken puttanesca, including anchovies, olives, capers and tomatoes.
  • Skin-On Chicken Thighs: The first step is to brown the chicken skin, which starts the dish off with great flavor.
  • Anchovies: I promise you won't "taste" the anchovies in the recipe, but it offers a fantastic savory layer. Use a few fillets of jarred anchovies or a good squeeze of anchovy paste in a tube.
  • Garlic: Fresh and chopped finely. A diced shallot would be delicious as well.
  • Canned Tomatoes: Either crushed or diced tomatoes. Fresh tomatoes will work too, but I suggest using in season tomatoes if you can.
  • Red Wine: I like using a drier red wine, such as a blend, Cabernet or Merlot.
  • Pitted Olives: This recipe has two kinds of olives, Castelveltrano which are more mild and buttery. And Kalamata olives that are stronger and brinier. I like the combination of both, but use either one, if preferred.
  • Capers: A classic in puttanesca and also really good in a lighter kale pasta with olives and capers.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

A Note on Anchovies

If anchovies make you nervous, don’t worry. Once they’re sautéed in olive oil, they completely melt into the sauce and don’t taste fishy at all. Instead, they add a deep, savory umami flavor that gives the sauce its first layer of richness.

You can use oil-packed anchovy fillets from a jar, which break down easily in the pan, or anchovy paste from a tube. If using paste, about one to two teaspoons is plenty. This is one of those ingredients that quietly makes everything better without calling attention to itself.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Add More Spice: If you want more spice, Calabrian chiles are a fantastic option. They add a slightly fruity heat and deep flavor. Add a teaspoon and sauté right after the cooking the garlic.
  • Different cuts of chicken: This recipe works well with drumsticks or chicken breasts. Skin-on pieces will give you the best flavor. If using chicken breasts, make sure there is enough sauce to come about halfway up the chicken and allow a little extra cooking time.
  • Pork option: Bone-in pork chops are delicious here and can be cooked the same way, gently braised in the sauce until tender.
  • Seafood variations: Nestle salmon fillets directly into the sauce and gently poach for 10 to 15 minutes. Firm white fish like cod or halibut also works beautifully. Shrimp can be added during the last 5 to 8 minutes of cooking.
  • Tomato options: Crushed tomatoes, diced tomatoes, fresh chopped tomatoes, or even leftover marinara sauce all work well. In the summer, fresh tomatoes are especially delicious.
  • No wine: If you prefer not to cook with wine, you can simply omit it. The sauce will still be rich and flavorful.

⏲️ Instructions

Sear the chicken thighs on both sides until deeply golden, then set aside before you make the puttanesca sauce,

Sear the Chicken: Season the chicken thighs and sear them skin-side down in olive oil until deeply golden.

Saute anchovies in olive oil.

Build the Flavor Base: Sauté the anchovies in the rendered chicken fat until the anchovies dissolve. Then add the garlic and red pepper flakes and sauté for 30 seconds until fragrant.

Add the seared chicken to the puttanesca sauce and continue cooking.

Simmer Chicken in the Sauce: Nestle the seared chicken thighs skin-side up into the tomato sauce along with the olives and capers. Let everything simmer until the chicken is cooked through.

Simmer the puttanesca until sauce has reduced slightly and chicken is cooked through.

Garnish and Serve: Once the sauce has reduced and thickened, finish the dish with extra olives and a sprinkle of fresh parsley. Serve hot with plenty of sauce spooned over the chicken.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the chicken well: Pat the chicken dry with paper towels before seasoning. Dry skin helps create a better sear and more flavorful chicken.
  • Let the chicken sear undisturbed: When cooking skin-side down, resist moving the chicken. Let it cook until the skin is deeply golden and releases easily from the pan.
  • Break down the anchovies: Keep the heat at medium to medium-high and use your spatula to gently press the anchovies into the oil so they dissolve evenly.
  • Simmer gently: Once the chicken is in the sauce, keep it at a steady simmer rather than a boil. This keeps the chicken tender and allows the sauce to thicken nicely.
  • Make Ahead: This dish can be made up to three days in advance and the sauce tastes even better the next day, though the chicken skin will soften as it sits.
Easy chicken puttanesca with olives, capers and anchovies.

Serving Suggestions

This chicken puttanesca is all about the flavorful sauce, so it pairs best with something that can soak up every last bit. Serve alongside a simple starch or fresh side to balance the bold, briny flavors.

  • Creamy Polenta to soak up the rich sauce.
  • Creme Fraiche Mashed Potatoes
  • Roasted Garlic Focaccia
  • Classic Caesar Salad

More Delicious Chicken Recipes

  • One pot honey Dijon roast chicken and pears are cooked with wedges shallots in a simple sweet and savory herb glaze.
    Honey Dijon Roast Chicken and Pears
  • Spicy Asian Chicken Lettuce Wraps
  • One pot chicken with rice and chickpeas is seasoned with bold spices and layered with fresh lemon slices.
    One Pot Lemon Chicken and Rice with Chickpeas
  • Spanish inspired chicken stew with olives and potatoes.
    Spanish Chicken Stew

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This easy chicken puttanesca recipe has seared chicken in a savory tomato sauce with olives and capers.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Chicken Puttanesca Recipe

This chicken puttanesca is all about the flavorful sauce, so it pairs best with something that can soak up every last bit. Serve alongside a simple starchor fresh side to balance the bold, briny flavors.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main
Cuisine: American, Italian
Keyword: chicken puttanesca, chicken puttanesca recipe, easy chicken puttanesca, skillet chicken puttanesca
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 510kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • rubber spatula

Ingredients

  • 2 to 2½ pounds bone-in skin-on chicken thighs
  • Salt and pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 anchovy fillets
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 1 28-ounce can crushed tomatoes
  • ¼ cup capers
  • ½ cup pitted Castelvetrano olives roughly chopped, plus more for garnish if desired
  • ½ cup pitted Kalamata olives roughly chopped, plus more for garnish if desired
  • Chopped parsley for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Season and sear the chicken: Season the chicken thighs with salt and pepper on both sides. Heat a wide skillet over medium heat and add the olive oil.
  • Once hot, place the chicken skin-side down and cook until the skin is deeply golden and crisp, about 5 to 7 minutes. Flip and cook the other side for 3 to 4 minutes. Transfer the chicken to a plate. The chicken will not be fully cooked at this stage.
  • Build the flavor base: In the same skillet, add the anchovies and cook, pressing them into the oil until they dissolve. Stir in the garlic and red pepper flakes and cook for another 30 seconds-1 minute until fragrant.
  • Deglaze and simmer the sauce: Pour in the red wine and use a spatula to scrape up any browned bits from the bottom of the pan. Let the wine reduce for about 2 minutes, then stir in the crushed tomatoes.
  • Finish cooking the chicken: Nestle the chicken thighs back into the sauce, skin-side up, and scatter the capers and chopped olives around the chicken. Reduce the heat to a good simmer and cook uncovered for 18 to 20 minutes, or until the chicken is cooked through and the sauce has slightly thickened.
  • Serve: Once done, remove from heat, garnish with chopped parsley and add more chopped olives, if desired. Serve the chicken with plenty of puttanesca sauce spooned over the top.

Video

Notes

  • Pat the chicken dry before seasoning to help the skin sear properly.
  • As the anchovies cook, use your spatula to gently press them into the oil so they dissolve and evenly flavor the sauce.
  • Keep the sauce at a good simmer rather than a boil. This helps the chicken stay tender and allows the sauce to thicken naturally.
  • This recipe can be made up to three days in advance. The flavors deepen as it sits, though the chicken skin will soften slightly.
For other wonderful Chicken meals, try my One Pot Chicken Provencal or my Chicken Francese.

Nutrition

Calories: 510kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 46g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 149mg | Sodium: 957mg | Potassium: 816mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 238IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 2mg

Tahdig (Persian Rice with Crispy Bottom)

Jan 12, 2026 · 79 Comments

This crispy Persian rice is called tahdig and is made with fragrant basmati rice and has a layer of crispy rice that's flavored with saffron and turmeric.

Learn how to make classic Persian rice called tahdig, famous for its golden, crispy bottom and fluffy grains.

This is one of the very first recipes I shared over 13 years ago, and it remains one of the most loved and visited recipes on my site. While I’ve refreshed the photos and clarified the steps, the heart of the recipe and the technique, remains exactly the same.

Tahdig is Persian rice with a crispy crust called "tah-dig".
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Tahdig is a classic Persian rice dish known for its crispy, golden bottom, which is often considered the best part of the meal.

The word tahdig literally translates to “bottom of the pot,” which is exactly where the magic happens. As the rice steams, a deeply golden, crunchy layer forms underneath, flavored with saffron and turmeric. The better your tahdig, the more praise it earns, and yes, it’s often the first thing to disappear from the table.

This recipe uses just four ingredients, but it’s more about technique than complexity. Once you understand the method, tahdig becomes a celebratory dish that’s incredibly rewarding to make.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for Tahdig, including basmati rice, olive oil, turmeric, saffron and salt.
  • Basmati Rice: Use a high-quality long-grain basmati rice for the best results. This is the one recipe where quality truly matters because not all rice is created equal. I love India Gate basmati, which gives beautiful, fluffy results every time.
  • Saffron: A little goes a long way and even a small amount will last you a while. Choose good-quality saffron with deep red threads and a strong aroma. Bloom the saffron in warm water so it extracts both color and flavor, ensuring every thread is utilized.
  • Olive Oil: Use a neutral, good-tasting olive oil. It doesn't have to be overly peppery or robust, just something clean that will help create a crispy bottom.
  • Turmeric: This is my addition for a deeper golden hue and subtle warmth. You can leave it out and use only saffron.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Tahdig Variations

  • Potato Tahdig: Add thinly sliced potatoes to the bottom for an extra crunchy crust.
  • Lavash Tahdig: Add a thin layer of lavash flatbread to create a chip-like layer.
  • Jeweled Rice with Tahdig: Layer the rice with dried fruit and nuts. This one is always a showstopper!

⏲️ How to Make Tahdig (Step by Step)

Preparing the Rice

Add rice to a large bowl and fill with water, it will look cloudy so be sure to rinse it several times until the water runs clear.

Rinse the Rice: Rinse the basmati rice in a large bowl with cold water. The water will look very cloudy at first.

Rinse the basmati rise several times until the water is clear.

Rinse Until the Water is Clear: Continue rinsing several times until the water is very clear. This step is essential for light, fluffy rice. Soak rice in salted water for 20 minutes.

Parboiling the Rice

While the rice par-boils, use a spoon to skim off any foam that floats to the top.

Parboil the Rice: Boil rice for 7-8 minutes. Skim off any foam that rises to the surface.

Drain the par-cooed basmati rise and rinse under cool water to stop the cooking.

Drain the Rice: After parboiling, the rice should be tender on the outside and firm on the inside. Drain and rinse with cold water to stop the cooking process.

Make the Tahdig

Steep ground saffron in a few tablespoons of warm water to bloom.

Bloom the Saffron: Crush the saffron and add to a few tablespoons of warm water. Let it steep for a few minutes.

Add olive oil, saffron water and turmeric to a wide skillet and mix to even distribute.

Create the Tahdig Base: Heat olive oil in a non-stick skillet and add saffron water and turmeric. Swirl gently to evenly coat the bottom.

Add the first layer of rice onto the saffron and oil mixture. use a spatula to gent spread it out into an even layer, this will be the tahdig aka the crispy rice layer.

Form the Crispy Layer: Spoon a layer of rice directly onto the saffron mixture. This first layer will become the crispy tahdig.

Add the rest of the par-cooked rice to the skillet and use the handle of the spatula to poke several holes into the rice, being careful not to poke all the way down to the bottom.

Layer the Rice: Add remaining rice on top. Use the handle of a spatula to poke a few holes into the rice, this allows steam to escape.

Wrap a clean kitchen towel around the lid of and place it on the skillet. This soaks up excess moisture and ensures a light and airy rice.

Cook the Rice: Wrap the lid with a clean kitchen towel and cover the rice. Cook for about 30 minutes, or until you hear gentle crackling sounds.

Once the rice is done, flip the tahdig onto a wide plate, it should release from the pan easily and be a even, golden and crispy.

Flip and Serve: Once fully cooked, invert the pan onto a serving plate so the crispy bottom is revealed on top. The tahdig should release easily.

📍 Recipe Tips for Perfect Tahdig

  • Rinse the Rice Well: Rinse the rice several times until the water is completely clear. This removes excess starch and is key to fluffy, separate grains.
  • Soak the Rice: After rinsing, soak the rice in salted water, which both seasons the rice and improves the final outcome.
  • Don't Skip Parboiling: This gives the rice a head start. Set a timer and check the grains, they should be tender on the outside and still firm in the center.
  • Use a Non-stick Skillet for Best Results: This makes flipping the tahdig much easier and helps the crispy layer release cleanly.
  • Listen for the Crackle: As the rice cooks, you should hear sizzling and crackling, a sign that the tahdig is forming. If you smell burning, lower the heat.
  • Stove Temperatures Vary: Tahdig is a technique-focused dish and every stove runs a little differently, so trust your senses. Use the timing as a guide and adjust as needed.
Persian rice recipe with tahdig is amde with fragrant basmati rice and a crispy saffron rice layer called tah-dig.

Serving Suggestions

Tahdig is traditionally served alongside flavorful stews, braises and roasted meats. Its golden, crispy bottom and fragrant rice pair beautifully with bold Mediterranean and Middle Eastern dishes. Here are a few favorites.

  • Chicken Tagine with Olives and Preserved Lemon
  • Greek Braised Lamb Shanks
  • Braised Chicken with Dates and Saffron
  • Herb Crusted Salmon
  • Slow-cooked Lamb Shawarma

More Great Rice Recipes

  • Persian rice with dates, chopped pistachios and aromatic cardamom is steamed together with an additive and crunchy saffron crust called tahdig.
    Persian Rice with Dates and Pistachios
  • Greek rice pilaf with orzo and fresh dill.
    Greek Rice Pilaf with Orzo
  • Colorful jeweled rice with saffron and dried fruit and nuts.
    Persian Jeweled Rice
  • A decadent and impressive spiced rice dish that literally translates to "stuffing". Layered with warm spices of cinnamon and allspice, savory ground beef and toasted pine nuts.
    Lebanese Hashweh Rice (Spiced Rice with Ground Beef and Pine Nuts)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This crispy Persian rice is called tahdig and is made with fragrant basmati rice and has a layer of crispy rice that's flavored with saffron and turmeric.
Print Recipe
4.91 from 144 votes

Tahdig (Persian Rice with Crispy Bottom)

Tahdig is a classic Persian rice dish known for its golden, crispy bottom and fluffy grains. This step-by-step recipe walks you through the technique for perfect tahdig every time.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Middle Eastern
Keyword: Persian rice, saffron rice, tah-dig, tahdig
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 288kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Non-stick skillet
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Small mortar and pestle

Ingredients

  • 2 cups basmati rice
  • 1 large pinch saffron threads
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
  • Salt for soaking and boiling
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Rinse and Soak the Rice. In a large bowl, rinse the rice several times until the water runs completely clear.
  • Fill the bowl with fresh water, add a generous pinch of salt, and let the rice soak for about 20 minutes while you bring a pot of water to a boil.
    *Reserve 3 tablespoons of hot water for blooming the saffron.
  • Parboil the Rice. Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Drain the rice and add it to the boiling water.
  • Cook uncovered on medium-high heat for 7–8 minutes, skimming off any foam that rises to the surface.
  • The rice should be tender on the outside but still firm in the center. Drain and rinse briefly under cold water to stop the cooking.
  • Prepare the Saffron. Crush the saffron threads using a mortar and pestle (if needed). Add to the reserved hot water and let bloom for a few minutes.
  • Create the Tahdig. Heat a 10–12 inch nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add olive oil, bloomed saffron water, and turmeric, swirling to evenly coat the bottom of the pan.
  • Spoon a thin, even layer of rice directly onto the saffron mixture, this will become the crispy tahdig layer.
  • Add the remaining rice on top, forming a gentle mound. Use the handle of a spoon or spatula to poke a few holes into the rice to allow steam to escape.
  • Steam and Cook. Wrap the skillet lid with a clean kitchen towel and cover the rice. Cook on medium to medium-high heat for about 30–35 minutes, or until you hear gentle crackling sounds.
    *If your stove runs hot, reduce the heat slightly.
  • Flip and Serve. Remove the lid and place a serving plate over the skillet. Carefully invert to release the rice, revealing the golden, crispy tahdig on top.
  • Alternatively, spoon out the rice and break the tahdig into pieces to serve alongside.

Notes

  • Rinse the rice thoroughly until the water runs completely clear to remove excess starch and ensure fluffy, separate grains.
  • Parboil the rice just until tender on the outside but still firm in the center, set a timer for 7-8 minutes.
  • Use a 10–12 inch nonstick skillet, this makes flipping the tahdig much easier. As the rice cooks, listen for gentle sizzling and crackling.
  • If you smell burning, lower the heat slightly, stove temperatures vary, so trust your senses.

Nutrition

Calories: 288kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 80mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 0.6mg

Chicken Tagine with Preserved Lemons and Olives

Jan 8, 2026 · 6 Comments

This flavorful chicken tagine is layered with preserved lemons, olives, dried apricots and an array of bold spices.

This weeknight chicken tagine is all about bold flavors! Warmly spiced chicken is simmered with preserved lemons, olives, and sweet dried apricots for a deeply flavorful dish that fills your kitchen with the most incredible aroma.

Chicken tagine with preserved lemons, olives, dried apricots and flavored with bold spices.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This weeknight chicken tagine is one of those recipes that instantly upgrades your chicken game! It’s packed with bold Moroccan-inspired flavors, yet it’s absolutely doable on a weeknight.

Instead of using a traditional tagine pot, the deeply spiced chicken is seared in a cast-iron skillet until the skin is beautifully golden and flavorful, then gently simmered with onions, carrots, preserved lemons, olives, and dried apricots. The result is incredibly tender, aromatic chicken with layers of warm, savory, citrusy flavor in every bite.

The spice blend features turmeric, coriander, paprika, and cinnamon, creating that signature North African flavor profile. Preserved lemons add a floral, salty brightness that perfumes the entire dish as it cooks.

Serve it with lemon couscous, rice pilaf, or warm pita bread to soak up every bit of that incredible sauce.

Spices and Ingredients

Ingredients for chicken tagine including preserved lemons, olives, dried apricots and spices.
  • Chicken: I prefer bone-in, skin-on chicken thighs here. The skin renders and browns beautifully and the rendered chicken fat is used to sauté the vegetables, adding even more flavor.
  • Spices: Cinnamon, turmeric, coriander and paprika create a balanced, aromatic base that’s savory and earthy with just a hint of sweetness.
  • Saffron: A pinch of saffron steeped in warm water adds a golden hue and subtle aroma. I like to lightly grind the threads before steeping for maximum flavor.
  • Preserved Lemons: Preserved lemons are floral, salty, and citrusy, and they give the tagine an unmistakable aroma. Homemade preserved lemons tend to be less salty than store-bought, so always taste before using (more on this below).
  • Olives: Castelveltrano olives are mild and buttery. Other green olives work too for a punchier bite.
  • Dried Apricots: Or other dried fruit that has a bit of tartness.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋What are Preserved Lemons?

Preserved lemons are whole lemons cured in salt, commonly used in North African and Mediterranean cooking. Over time, the rind becomes soft, fragrant, and deeply flavorful.

They taste exactly how you’d imagine: salty, lemony, citrusy, and aromatic.

A few important tips:

  • Not all preserved lemons taste the same. Some are saltier than others, so always taste before using
  • Many recipes suggest using only the peel, since it’s less salty than the flesh
  • I often use both, especially with homemade preserved lemons, just be sure to remove the seeds

For this chicken tagine recipe, I like using some of the flesh in the marinade and using thin slices of peel for garnish. Preserved lemons add incredible depth and are one of my favorite ways to bring bold citrus flavor to savory dishes.

If you want to try making your own, I have a full tutorial on homemade preserved lemons. You can often find them in the international section of most grocery stores or the olive bar, if your store has one.

Substitutions and Variations

  • Chicken Options: Instead of bone-in thighs, use boneless chicken thighs, which will cook slightly faster but will still stay incredibly tender. Chicken breasts are another option, just be sure to add ½ cup more braising liquid and cook longer.
  • No Preserved Lemons? Substitute with the zest of one whole lemon and add it to the chicken marinade and add the lemon juice to the braising liquid.
  • No Saffron? Totally fine to omit. The turmeric still provides great color and flavor.
  • Dried Fruit Swaps: Instead of apricots, substitute with roughly torn dates or dried figs. Both pair beautifully with olives and spices.

⏲️ Instructions

Marinate the chicken thighs with chopped preserved lemon, spices, olive oil and garlic toss to coat the chicken well.

Marinate the Chicken: In a bowl, whisk together garlic, olive oil, saffron, spices, and chopped preserved lemon. Add chicken and coat well.

Sear the preserved lemon chicken until deeply golden on both sides.

Sear the Chicken: Heat a cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Drizzle with olive oil and sear chicken skin-side down until deeply golden, about 5–7 minutes. Flip and cook another 4–5 minutes. Remove and set aside.

Saute carrots, onion and garlic in the reserved chicken fat.

Sauté the Vegetables: In the same skillet, sauté onions and carrots for about 3-4 minutes. Add garlic and cook for another 30 seconds until fragrant.

Make the tagine braising liquid and add the chicken stock, preserved lemon juice to a bowl and stir to combine.

Build the Braising Liquid: Add chicken stock and preserved lemon juice to the same marinade bowl and whisk to collect leftover spices.

Add the seared chicken to the sautéed vegetables and pour the preserved lemon and chicken stock mixture around the chicken.

Simmer: Nestle chicken back into the pan, skin-side up. Pour in the braising liquid and continue cooking for another 18–20 minutes, until chicken is cooked through.

Add the olives and dried apricots during the last few minutes of cooking the chicken tagine. Garnish with parsley.

Finish: During the last 5–10 minutes, scatter olives, apricots, and preserved lemon slices around the chicken. Garnish with parsley and serve.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the Chicken Well: Pat the chicken completely dry before marinating. This helps the spices adhere and allows the skin to brown properly.
  • Marinating Time: If you have time, marinate for 20 minutes to up to 8 hours. Even a short rest adds depth, but the dish is still excellent if you cook it right away.
  • Use the Marinade Bowl: After marinating, don’t wash the bowl. Use it to mix the braising liquid so you capture every bit of flavor left behind from the spices.
  • Don’t Overcrowd the Pan: Sear the chicken without moving it until it releases easily and the skin is properly browned.
Weeknight chicken tagine recipe with olives, preserved lemons, dried apricots and warm spices.

Serving Suggestions

  • Lemon Herb Couscous
  • Honey Harissa Cauliflower
  • Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad
  • Yellow Mediterranean Rice with Turmeric

More Flavorful Chicken Recipes to Try

  • Spanish inspired chicken stew with olives and potatoes.
    Spanish Chicken Stew
  • One pot chicken with rice and chickpeas is seasoned with bold spices and layered with fresh lemon slices.
    One Pot Lemon Chicken and Rice with Chickpeas
  • One pot chicken with saffron pearl couscous and zucchini.
    One Pot Israeli Couscous with Chicken
  • One pot chicken Provencal with white wine and olives.
    One Pot Chicken Provencal

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

A flavorful weeknight chicken tagine recipe made in nearly 30 minutes. With just a handful of bold spices, salty preserved lemons and buttery olives.
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Chicken Tagine with Preserved Lemons and Olives

This weeknight chicken tagine recipe is full of warm spices, preserved lemons, olives, and dried apricots.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Moroccan
Keyword: chicken tagine, chicken tagine with olives, easy chicken tagine, weeknight chicken tagine
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 733kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Cast Iron Skillet
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Chef Knife
  • Microplane

Ingredients

Chicken Marinade

  • 2 pounds bone-in skin-on chicken thighs
  • 2 garlic cloves grated or finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon liquid saffron or a pinch of saffron threads steeped in warm water
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon coriander
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Ground black pepper
  • 1 preserved lemon seeds removed and finely chopped

Braising Liquid

  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 2 tablespoons preserved lemon juice

Tagine

  • Olive oil for searing
  • 1 small red onion sliced thin
  • 2 carrots sliced
  • 2 garlic cloves grated or finely chopped
  • 1 cup pitted Castelvetrano olives
  • ½ cup dried apricots roughly chopped
  • 1 preserved lemon rind only, thinly sliced (garnish)

Instructions

  • Marinate the Chicken: Pat the chicken dry and set aside. In a bowl, whisk together garlic, olive oil, saffron, spices, and chopped preserved lemon. Add chicken and coat well.
  • Sear the Chicken: Heat a cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Add a drizzle of olive oil and sear chicken skin-side down until deeply golden, about 5–7 minutes. Flip and cook another 4–5 minutes. Remove and set aside.
  • Build the Braising Liquid: Add chicken stock and preserved lemon juice to the same marinade bowl and whisk to collect leftover spices.
  • Sauté the Vegetables: In the same skillet, sauté onions and carrots until just softened, about 3-4 minutes. Add garlic and cook for another 30 seconds until fragrant.
  • Simmer: Nestle chicken back into the pan, skin-side up. Pour in the braising liquid and bring to a gentle simmer. Continue cooking for another 18–20 minutes, until chicken is cooked through.
  • Finish: During the last 5–10 minutes, scatter olives, apricots, and preserved lemon slices around the chicken. Garnish with parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Dry the Chicken Well: Pat the chicken completely dry before marinating. This helps the spices adhere and allows the skin to brown properly.
  • Marinating Time: If you have time, marinate for at least 20 minutes or up to 8 hours. Even a short rest adds depth, but the dish is still excellent if cooked right away.
  • Taste the Preserved Lemons: Preserved lemons can vary in saltiness. Taste them before using and adjust the amount as needed, especially if using store-bought.
  • Use the Marinade Bowl: After marinating, use the same bowl to mix the braising liquid so none of the flavorful spices go to waste.
  • Don’t Overcrowd the Pan: Let the chicken sear undisturbed until it releases easily from the pan — that’s how you get deeply golden, flavorful skin.

Nutrition

Calories: 733kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 54g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 224mg | Sodium: 811mg | Potassium: 893mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 6237IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 64mg | Iron: 3mg

Creamy Lemon Tahini Sauce

Jan 7, 2026 · 5 Comments

This easy and creamy tahini sauce is mixed with garlic, fresh lemon juice that is the perfect addition to drizzle over grilled meats and vegetables.

This creamy lemon tahini sauce is a Mediterranean staple that is made with tahini, fresh lemon juice, garlic and a touch of cumin. It's quick to make and perfect for drizzling over grilled meats, roasted vegetables or serving as a simple dip.

This creamy lemon tahini sauce is a Mediterranean staple! Drizzle over grilled meats, vegetables or use as a dip.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

A creamy tahini sauce is one of those Mediterranean staples you'll make on repeat! It's made with just a few ingredients, including tahini (sesame seed paste), fresh lemon juice, garlic and a pinch of cumin for subtle warmth.

Once the savory sauce comes together, it becomes perfectly creamy, savory and nutty and is a fabulous addition to so many dishes! Drizzle it over a falafel bowl or onto roasted eggplant or serve as a dip with pita bread and fresh vegetables.

Tahini is a key ingredient in Mediterranean cooking, so be sure to add it to your Mediterranean diet shopping list. You can usually find tahini in the nut butter section of most grocery stores.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for lemon tahini sauce with garlic and cumin.
  • Tahini Paste: Tahini is a paste made from ground sesame seeds. It's commonly used in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisines. You can find tahini in the international aisle of most grocery stores, in health food stores, or online.
  • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves for the best flavor. A microplane helps ensure there are no large garlic pieces.
  • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice is key for the best and freshest flavor.
  • Cumin: Optional, but a touch of cumin adds a lovely warm layer of flavor.
  • Garnishes: Olive oil, smoked paprika, chopped parsley or cilantro.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Tahini Sauce Variations

There are so many ways to customize tahini sauce once you have the base recipe down. Have fun experimenting with different flavors and textures.

  • Lemon Herb Tahini Sauce: Fresh herbs take this sauce to the next level! It's fantastic with Lebanese hushwee or drizzled on top of roasted vegetables with pomegranate.
  • Tahini Yogurt Sauce: Mixing in a bit of yogurt gives the tahini sauce a delicious tang and creamier texture. I love serving this with homemade falafel.
  • Avocado Tahini Dressing: Thicker and richer, this variation is great for spreading on toasted bread and topping with fresh tomatoes.
  • Green Tahini Sauce: One of my most popular recipes from my first cookbook, this herby version is packed with fresh mint, cilantro and parsley.
  • Honey Tahini Sauce: A sweet version that's perfect for desserts. I love using this on blueberry borekas or drizzling it over anything that needs a little sweetness.

How to Make Tahini Sauce

You can make tahini sauce either in a food processor or by hand. Both methods work great.

Food Processor Method

  1. Add tahini, garlic, lemon juice, water, salt and cumin to a food processor.
  2. Blend until smooth, scraping down the sides as needed. The sauce will thicken at first, then loosen as it blends.
  3. Add more water a little at a time until the sauce reaches a thick, honey-like consistency.

Whisked by Hand Method

  1. Use a microplane to finely grate the fresh garlic or make sure to finely chop it so there are no large garlic pieces.
  2. Add all of the ingredients to a bowl and whisk vigorously. The tahini will seize and thicken at first, but keep whisking and it will smooth out and become creamy.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Sauce Thickening: Tahini sauce will thicken as it sits, especially in the fridge. Let it come to room temperature, then whisk in a little water to loosen it.
  • Add Water Gradually: Start with less water at first and add more as needed.
  • Consistency: The sauce should be thick like honey and be easy to drizzle.
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Tahini sauce can be made ahead and stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.
This creamy lemon tahini sauce is a Mediterranean staple! Drizzle over grilled meats, vegetables or use as a dip.

Serving Suggestions

I truly put this creamy lemon tahini sauce on everything! It adds richness, creaminess and instantly makes dishes feel complete. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy tahini sauce.

  • Drizzle over Beef Arayes (Lebanese meat-stuffed pitas).
  • Spoon on top of Mediterranean crispy rice salad.
  • Add it to a falafel platter alongside fresh vegetables.
  • Fantastic drizzled over Greek nachos.

More Mediterranean dips to Try

  • Easy and creamy homemade hummus is garnished with olive oil and sprinkle of paprika on top.
    Creamy Homemade Hummus
  • Authentic baba ganoush recipe drizzled with olive oil and paprika.
    Lebanese Baba Ganoush
  • Muhammara dip topped with pomegranate seeds and lemon zest.
    Muhammara(Turkish Red Pepper and Walnut Dip)
  • Creamy whipped feta topped with marinated olives and toasted pine nuts.
    Whipped Feta with Marinated Olives and Toasted Pine Nuts

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This easy and creamy tahini sauce is mixed with garlic, fresh lemon juice that is the perfect addition to drizzle over grilled meats and vegetables.
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Creamy Lemon Tahini Sauce

This easy and creamy lemon tahini sauce is mixed with garlic, fresh lemon juice, making it the perfect addition to drizzle over grilled meats and vegetables.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Keyword: creamy tahini sauce, lemon tahini sauce, tahini sauce
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 286kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Microplane
  • rubber spatula

Ingredients

  • 1 cup tahini paste
  • 2 garlic cloves finely grated or minced
  • 1 lemon juiced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin optional
  • ¼ –½ cup water plus more as needed
  • Garnishes
  • Olive oil
  • Smoked paprika
  • Cayenne for heat
  • Chopped parsley or cilantro

Instructions

  • Add tahini paste, garlic, lemon juice, salt, cumin (if using), and water to a food processor. Blend until smooth, scraping down the sides as needed.
  • If the sauce is too thick, add more water a little at a time and continue blending until the sauce reaches a thick, honey-like consistency.

Notes

  • If the sauce thickens in the fridge, whisk in a little water to loosen it.
  • If making by hand, be sure the garlic is very finely chopped or grated.
  • Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 286kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 175mg | Potassium: 208mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 109IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg

Smoked Trout Dip

Dec 25, 2025 · 1 Comment

Smoked trout dip with capers, dill and lemon.

This easy smoked trout dip is the perfect appetizer for last-minute entertaining. Flaky smoked trout is mixed with fresh herbs, capers and bright lemon with the perfect amount of tang and creaminess, thanks to yogurt and mascarpone.

Easy smoked trout dip with capers and dill.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This smoked trout dip is one of those effortless appetizers you can throw together at the last minute. It’s light, flavorful, not overly creamy (no mayonnaise needed!), with chunks of smoky trout, fresh herbs, lemon zest, and a little briny pop of capers.

It's a simple mix-in-a-bowl recipe that comes together in minutes. Spread the trout dip on a bagel for brunch, or serve alongside crackers, fresh vegetables or matzo for an easy appetizer.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for smoked trout dip including lemon, fresh dill, shallot and mascarpone.
  • Smoked Trout: Smoked trout is a smoked fillet of trout, usually found in the refrigerated seafood section. It may have the skin attached (which easily peels off), and while the bones are very small, remove any larger ones if you find them.
  • Greek Yogurt: Greek Yogurt adds tang and thickness while keeping the dip light. Sour cream works just as well if that’s what you have on hand.
  • Mascarpone: Mascarpone is an Italian cream cheese that’s softer and creamier than traditional cream cheese.
  • Capers: Capers are salt-cured flower buds that add a briny, savory punch. They pair beautifully with smoked fish and lemon.
  • Fresh Dill: Fresh dill is essential here! It brightens and wakes up all the smoky, savory flavors. Dried dill can work in a pinch, but fresh really makes the dish shine.
  • Lemon: Both lemon zest and juice add layers of citrus flavor. The zest brings aromatic brightness, while the juice adds acidity.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Swap mascarpone for cream cheese if needed, but use less so the dip stays light.
  • Use sour cream instead of yogurt for a richer feel.
  • No fresh dill? Dried dill works, just use a smaller amount.
  • Add a pinch of Aleppo pepper for gentle warmth.

⏲️ Instructions

Add all of the smoked trout dip ingredients to a bowl.

Add ingredients. To a bowl, add the flaked smoked trout, shallot, dill, lemon zest and juice, capers and yogurt and mascarpone.

Mix the smoked trout dip ingredients all together until well combined.

Mix well. Use a fork to mix everything together, making sure to keep the flaky smoked trout intact.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Mix by hand, not in a food processor. A processor will make the dip too smooth and pâté-like.
  • Taste after chilling. Let the flavors really come together after 20–30 minutes, then taste and adjust.
  • If your smoked trout is packed in oil or brine, add a tiny splash to the mixture for even more smoky flavor.
  • Smoked trout dip can be made ahead up to 3 days in advance.
  • Salt lightly. The smoked trout and capers have a good amount of salt, so taste first and add salt if needed.
Serve the smoked trout dip with vegetables, crackers and crostini.

Serving Suggestions

  • Crackers or crostini.
  • Cucumber slices, radishes, endive.
  • Matzo (great for Passover).
  • Spread on a bagel with extra dill.
  • Serve alongside other dips for a fun appetizer spread like caramelized onion dip or whipped feta with olives.

More Dip Recipes To Try

  • Homemade tzatziki sauce with homemade pita chips.
    Homemade Tzatziki Sauce (with Pita Chips)
  • Muhammara dip topped with pomegranate seeds and lemon zest.
    Muhammara(Turkish Red Pepper and Walnut Dip)
  • Bread dipping oil with sundried tomatoes, fresh herbs and parmesan cheese.
    Bread Dipping Oil with Fresh Herbs
  • Homemade caramelized onion dip recipe.
    Caramelized Onion Dip

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Smoked trout dip with capers, dill and lemon.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Smoked Trout Dip

This easy smoked trout dip is mixed fresh herbs, lemon, capers, yogurt, and mascarpone. Perfect for appetizers, brunch, or last-minute entertaining
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Breakfast
Cuisine: American
Keyword: smoked trout dip, smoked trout dip with capers
Servings: 2 servings
Calories: 147kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Microplane
  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 4 –5 oz smoked trout flaked with a fork
  • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • ¼ cup mascarpone softened
  • ½ small shallot finely minced, about 1-2 tablespoons
  • Zest of ½ lemon + lemon juice
  • 2 teaspoons chopped fresh dill or ¼–½ teaspoon dried
  • 2 teaspoons capers
  • Black pepper to taste
  • Salt only if needed
  • Optional: ½–1 teaspoon of the oil/brine from the smoked trout if it’s packed in liquid
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Flake the trout: Use a fork to gently flake the smoked trout into a medium bowl. Leave some pieces a bit chunky. Remove any large bones if noticeable.
  • Add the dip ingredients: Add the yogurt, mascarpone, shallot, lemon zest and juice, fresh dill, capers and a good grind of black pepper. Stir until just combined.
  • If your smoked trout came in oil/brine, you can add up to 1 teaspoon for extra smoky flavor.
  • Chill briefly: Let the dip rest for 20–30 minutes in the fridge so the flavors meld. Then taste and adjust as needed.
  • Serve: Spoon into a shallow bowl and top with a little extra dill. Serve with crackers, bagels or vegetables.

Notes

  • Mix by hand, not in a food processor. A processor will make the dip too smooth and pâté-like.
  • Taste after chilling. Let the flavors really come together after 20–30 minutes, then taste and adjust.
  • If your smoked trout is packed in oil or brine, add a tiny splash to the mixture for even more smoky flavor.
  • Smoked trout dip can be made ahead up to 3 days in advance.
  • Salt lightly. The smoked trout and capers have a good amount of salt, so taste first and add salt if needed.

Nutrition

Calories: 147kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 81mg | Potassium: 58mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 405IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Classic Italian Rainbow Cookies

Dec 21, 2025 · 3 Comments

Italian rainbow cookies are also called seven layer rainbow cookies because of their distinct layers.

Italian rainbow cookies are a classic bakery favorite! These iconic tri-color cookies are more like little cake squares made with aromatic almond cake, layered with sweet fruit jam and covered in decadent chocolate.

Squares of Italian rainbow cookies are delicious served right on a plate for sharing.

Rainbow cookies take me right back to my childhood growing up in New York and they are the first ones I reach for during the holidays. That is, along with rugelach, of course.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

What are Italian Rainbow Cookies?

Italian rainbow cookies, also known as seven layer cookies or Venetian cookies, are classic tricolor treats commonly found in Jewish and Italian bakeries on the East Coast. They are called seven layer cookies because of their distinct layers. Three thin layers of almond cake are stacked with a light layer of jam in between and finished with a chocolate coating on both sides.

They are more like a petite cake rather than a traditional cookie and are still one of my all-time favorite treats!  They are truly a labor of love that is worth every single minute. Think of these as little squares of cake with an aromatic almond flavor, a hint of fruit, and just enough chocolate to bring it all together.

Unlike many traditional recipes that bake each layer separately, this version uses one sheet pan with all three layers baked side by side, making the process simpler and more approachable.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for Italian rainbow cookies including almond paste, chocolate chips, sugar and almond extract.
  • Almond paste: This is the key ingredient in rainbow cookies. Almond paste is made up of ground almonds. Unlike marzipan, which has sugar added, almond paste is less sweet and often used in pastries.  
  • Gel food coloring: All you need is a few drops to get that vibrant red and green that rainbow cookies are known for (natural colorings will be softer).
  • Eggs: Use whole eggs and bring them to room temperature. This helps the egg whites whip more easily.
  • Apricot or raspberry jam: Look for a smooth jam with no large pieces of fruit.
  • Bittersweet chocolate: Because the rainbow cookies are sweet, bittersweet chocolate pairs nicely as the coating without adding too much sweetness. Look for at least 70% cocoa.
  • Almond extract: This adds another layer of almond flavor. Don’t overdo it though, as almond extract is potent.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Different Fruit Jams: Raspberry jam is a classic alternative and pairs beautifully with chocolate. Apricot is traditional and my personal favorite.
  • Jam texture: If your preserves are chunky, whisk briefly or warm a few seconds in the microwave to loosen them without heating them too hot.
  • Coloring: Gel food coloring gives more vibrant layers. However, natural coloring works, but you’ll need significantly more drops and colors won’t be as vibrant.
  • Gluten-Free Option: I have successfully made Italian rainbow cookies with a gluten free flour blend, with great results.

⏲️ Instructions

How to Whip Egg Whites

Whipping the egg whites correctly is key to creating light, even cake layers. Take your time and focus on texture rather than speed.

What to Look For:

  • Foamy to glossy: At the beginning stage, the whites will start foamy, then turn bright white and glossy as air is incorporated.
  • Stiff peaks: When you lift the whisk, the whites should hold their shape without drooping.
  • Smooth and cohesive: The whites should look thick and silky, not dry or grainy.
At the beginning stage of whipping egg whites, they will start to break up and become frothy.

Beginning stage: As you begin to whisk the egg whites, they will look foamy.

Whip the egg whites until medium-hard peaks.

Whisk to stiff peaks: Continue whisking and the whites will become stiff, glossy, and will hold their shape on the whisk. This is exactly what you’re aiming for. Then transfer to a separate bowl.

How to Make Rainbow Cookies

Mix the almond paste with egg yolks and sugar until mixed well.

Prepare the almond batter: Beat the almond paste, butter, sugar, egg yolks, and almond extract until smooth and fully combined.

At this point, you'll have two bowls. One with the almond paste mixture and the other with the whipped egg whites.

Fold in the egg whites: Use a rubber spatula to fold half of the egg whites into the almond batter, then continue with the other half until just mixed through.

Dye one bowl of rainbow cookie batter with a few drops of green food coloring and mix well. Do the same with the second bowl and with red food coloring and leave the third bowl as is.

Divide and color the batter: Divide the batter evenly into three bowls. Tint one bowl with red food coloring, one with green, and leave the third plain.

Divide a cookie sheet into three sections and spread the Italian rainbow cookie batters on the cookie sheet, keeping the colors separate.

Spread the batter: Spread each color into a thin, even layer on the same parchment-lined sheet pan, keeping the colors side by side. Use an offset spatula and spread each section about 5 inches wide.

Baked rainbow cookie batter, use a knife to separate the three colors.

Bake and separate: Bake until just set and lightly golden. Once cooled, cut between the colors to separate the three cake layers.

Spread a thin layer of apricot jam on the white/yellow layer.

Spread Jam: Place one colored layer on a flat surface and spread a thin layer of jam on top.

Stack the green layer of the rainbow cookie on top.

Assemble the layers: Stack with the remaining layers, adding jam between each.

Once all the Italian rainbow cookie layers are stacked, weigh it down with a cookie sheet and cans and place in the fridge to chill.

Press and chill: Place a sheet of parchment paper and top with a sheet pan, and weigh down with cans. Chill for at least 8 hours or overnight.

Use a double boiler to gently melt chocolate until it's a pourable consistency.

Melt the chocolate: Melt the chocolate in a double boiler until smooth and glossy. A double boiler is simply a heat-safe bowl set over gently simmering water.

Use an offset spatula to spread a thin layer of melted chocolate over the top of the Italian rainbow cookie.

Coat the layers: Spread a thin, even layer of melted chocolate over the top using an offset spatula. Chill until firm before flipping and coating the second side.

🔪 How to Cut Italian Rainbow Cookies

Cutting rainbow cookies is easiest once the chocolate is fully set and the layers are cold.

  • Use a serrated knife for clean cuts.
  • Trim the edges first for neat, even cookies.
  • Cut into long strips, then slice into squares.
  • Warm and dry the knife between cuts to prevent cracking.
Chill the Italian rainbow cookies in the fridge to harden the chocolate, then repeat on the other side so both sides are coated ith a thin layer of chocolate.

Chill the chocolate: Once coated in melted chocolate, chill in the refrigerator for at least 15 minutes until chocolate hardens. Then repeat with the other side.

Use a clean serrated knife to cut the sheet of rainbow Italian cookies into long pieces and then into squares.

Trim and cut: Use a serrated knife to trim the edges, then cut into logs, then into squares.

How to Make Italian Rainbow Cookies (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Don’t Overfill the Jam Layers: Make sure the jam has no large pieces of fruit and is easy to spread. Use only a thin layer between each cake. Too much jam can cause the layers to slide or separate.
  • Use the Flat Side for Stacking: When assembling the layers, flip each cake layer so the flat side is facing up. This helps keep the stack even and makes the finished cookies easier to cut.
  • Layers Might Crack: The almond cake layers are delicate and may crack when flipping or stacking. Once the layers are chilled and coated in chocolate, any cracks will not be noticeable.
  • Chill and Weigh Down Overnight: Weighing down the layers helps everything bind together and makes slicing much cleaner. Place another sheet pan on top and weigh it down with heavy cans. Chill for at least 8 hours or overnight.
  • Serrated Knife Is Your Best Friend: Use a serrated knife once the chocolate is fully set. Run the knife under warm water and dry it well before slicing for clean, sharp cuts.
  • Bring to Room Temperature Before Serving: Remove the cookies from the refrigerator about 10 minutes before serving. The almond sponge and jam soften slightly and the flavors really open up.
Seven layer Italian rainbow cookies with apricot jam and coated in a thin layer of chocolate.

Storage & Make-Ahead

Store the cut cookies in an airtight container, layering them between parchment or wax paper. Keep refrigerated for up to a week. The flavors get even better after a day or two.

More Favorite Cookie Recipes

  • Rainbow hamantaschen cookies filled with apricot jam and dipped in chocolate.
    Italian Rainbow Cookie Hamantaschen
  • Small plate of cherry pistachio rugelach with a small bowl of chopped pistachios off to the side.
    Cherry Pistachio Rugelach
  • The perfect Holiday cookie, Italian wedding cookies are light as air with almonds, powdered sugar and lots of butter!
    Italian Wedding Cookies
  • Lemon Biscotti with Pistachios and White Chocolate

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Italian rainbow cookies are also called seven layer rainbow cookies because of their distinct layers.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Italian Rainbow Cookies

A classic in Italian bakeries, Italian rainbow cookies, aka, seven layer rainbow cookies are stacked with an almond sponge, a thin layer apricot jam and covered with chocolate.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Chilling8 hours hrs
Total Time8 hours hrs 55 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Italian
Keyword: italian rainbow cookies, seven layer rainbow cookies
Servings: 40 cookies
Calories: 166kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • offset spatula
  • Baking sheet
  • Kitchenaid Mixer
  • Nesting Bowls
  • rubber spatula

Ingredients

  • 4 large eggs separated and at room temperature
  • 1 cup granulated sugar divided
  • 1 8-ounce tube almond paste
  • 1¼ cups unsalted butter softened
  • 1 teaspoon almond extract
  • 2 cups all-purpose flour
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • Gel food coloring red and green
  • 12 ounces smooth apricot preserves or raspberry preserves
  • 12 ounces bittersweet chocolate chips
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat and Prepare the Pan: Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a half-sheet pan with parchment paper, leaving a slight overhang for easy removal.
  • Whip the Egg Whites: Add the egg whites to a stand mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. Begin whisking on low speed until foamy, then increase to medium-high speed.
  • Once soft peaks form, slowly stream in ¼ cup of the sugar. Continue whisking until the whites are stiff, glossy, and hold their shape. Transfer to a separate bowl and set aside.
  • Make the Almond Batter: Wipe out the mixing bowl and switch to the paddle attachment. Add the almond paste and remaining ¾ cup sugar. Beat until smooth and broken down, about 3 minutes.
  • Add the butter and beat until light and fluffy. Add the egg yolks and almond extract and beat until fully incorporated.
  • Add the Flour: Reduce speed to low and add the flour and salt. Mix just until combined.
  • Fold in the Egg Whites: Using a rubber spatula, gently fold half of the whipped egg whites into the almond batter to loosen it. Fold in the remaining egg whites until just incorporated, being careful not to deflate the batter.
  • Divide and Color the Batter: Divide the batter evenly into three bowls. Tint one bowl red, one green, and leave the third plain. Mix each gently until evenly colored.
  • Spread and Bake: Visually divide the prepared sheet pan into thirds. Spread each color of batter into a thin, even layer side by side, about 5 inches wide per section. Use an offset spatula to smooth the tops.
  • Bake for 23–25 minutes, or until set and lightly golden. Let cool completely.
  • Separate and Assemble the Layers: Once cooled, cut between the colors to separate the three cake layers. Place one layer flat-side up and spread a thin layer of jam on top. Stack the second layer on top and spread another thin layer of jam. Finish with the final layer, placing it flat-side up for an even top.
  • Press and Chill: Cover with parchment paper, then place another sheet pan on top. Weigh it down with cans or heavy items and refrigerate for at least 8 hours or overnight.
  • Melt and Spread the Chocolate: Melt the chocolate in a double boiler until smooth and glossy. Spread a thin, even layer over the top of the chilled cake using an offset spatula.
  • Refrigerate until set, about 15 minutes. Flip and repeat on the other side. Chill again until fully firm.
  • Trim and Cut: Trim the edges using a serrated knife. Cut into long strips, then slice into squares. For the cleanest cuts, run the knife under warm water and dry it between slices.

Video

Notes

  • Use a thin layer of jam between the cake layers. Too much jam can cause slipping.
  • Stack the layers with the flattest sides facing up for the most even cookies.
  • The cake layers are delicate and may crack during assembly. Once chilled and coated in chocolate, imperfections will not be noticeable.
  • Chill the weighted layers for at least 8 hours or overnight for clean slicing.
  • Use a serrated knife, warmed and dried between cuts, for the cleanest slices.
  • Let cookies sit at room temperature for about 10 minutes before serving for the best texture and flavor.

Nutrition

Calories: 166kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 49mg | Potassium: 75mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 219IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 33mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe was originally published in 2011 and  inspired by Smitten Kitchen and has been updated over the years with simplified steps, ingredient tweaks, and a one sheet pan method.

Feast of the Seven Fishes Menu

Dec 19, 2025 · 2 Comments

This feast of the seven fishes menu walks you through recipe planning, seafood shopping tips and seafood recipe inspiration!

The Feast of the Seven Fishes is all about celebrating abundant seafood with vibrant, fresh flavors! This guide walks you through building a beautiful, seafood menu with recipe ideas, seafood buying tips and wine pairings.

Mix and match dishes to create a festive spread that’s full of flavor, color, and most importantly, fresh seafood!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

What is the Feast of the Seven Fishes?

The Feast of the Seven Fishes is a festive Italian-American Christmas Eve tradition centered around abundant seafood. While it’s rooted in tradition, there’s no single way to celebrate it, which leaves plenty of room for creativity based on what’s fresh and of course, what you and your guests love most.  

Some families serve seven separate seafood dishes, while others serve fewer dishes with a variety of fish and shellfish. Over time, the tradition has evolved, and today it’s all about gathering around the table and enjoying beautiful, flavorful seafood together.

How to Build a Feast of the Seven Fishes Menu

Instead of thinking in courses, think of dishes that complement each other and have variety in flavors, textures and color. Here are a few guidelines to keep in mind:

  • Have Fun with the Menu: You don't need exactly seven courses or seven different seafood options. Many modern menus include fewer dishes and some with several types of seafood in them.
  • Plan in Courses: I recommend a mix of appetizers, 1 pasta dish, 1 main seafood dish and a side or two that complement the seafood.
  • Mix Hot and Cold Dishes: This gives variety of flavors and textures and also easier to prep ahead instead of making everything hot all at once.

Appetizers and Small Plates

Start the dinner with several options for people to snack on and graze. (Choose 2-3)

Mediterranean Octopus Salad with Olives and Fennel

Steamed Clams with White Wine and Garlic

Baked Clams Casino

More Ideas:

  • Mussels Marinara: Fresh mussels are gently simmered in a simple and flavorful marinara sauce with garlic, white wine and basil. 
  • Shrimp Oreganata: Tender shrimp are stuffed with crispy breadcrumbs, lemon and Parmesan cheese and baked in a lemony white wine sauce.
  • Poké Nachos: Ahi tuna is generously topped onto baked wonton chips and garnished with all the fun toppings!
  • Spanish Garlic Shrimp: Inspired by the popular tapa, Gambas al Ajillo has sweet shrimp sautéed with fruity olive oil, smoky paprika and lots of garlic!
  • Chilled Seafood Platter: Fill the seafood platter with loads of fresh seafood, including steamed mussels and clams, shucked oysters, King crab legs and more!

Seafood Pasta Dishes

What's an Italian feast without a fresh pasta course? But my one rule, always have crusty bread to sop up the delicious sauce! (Choose 1-2)

Seafood Pasta with Mussels, Clams and Shrimp

Tuscan Shrimp Pasta with Sundried Tomatoes

Linguine and Clams

Show-Stopping Main Course

This is your centerpiece! Choose 1 stand-out seafood main course and let that shine!

Simple Bouillabaisse Recipe (French Seafood Stew)

Grilled Branzino with Lemon and Fresh Herbs

Classic Lobster Thermidor Recipe

More Options:

  • Salmon Wellington: Fillet of salmon is layered with Dijon mustard and creamed spinach that is nestled into buttery puff pastry.
  • Julia Child's Sole Meuniere: A true classic, lightly breaded fillets of sole, served with a lemony caper butter sauce.
  • Halibut Piccata: The tangy lemon and caper sauce perfectly balances the mild flavor of the halibut and coats the fish beautifully.

Side Dishes to Complement the Seafood

These side options complement the seafood beautifully! From fresh salads to breads to soak up all the delicious sauces.

Citrus Fennel Salad with Olives and Pistachios

Roasted Garlic Focaccia

Homemade Caesar Salad Dressing

A Mediterranean-Inspired Menu

For some inspiration, this simple menu is full of bright flavors, fresh herbs, and an abundance of seafood.

  • Appetizer: Mediterranean Octopus Salad with Olives and Mussels Marinara
  • Pasta Course: Linguine and Clams
  • Main Course: Bouillabaisse (French Seafood Stew)
  • Sides: Citrus and Fennel Salad

Seafood Shopping Tips

Buying good seafood makes all the difference! These simple tips will help you shop with confidence:

  • Fresh seafood should never smell fishy: It should smell clean and briny, like the ocean.
  • Buy seafood no more than 1–2 days in advance: Especially for fresh fish and shellfish. Ask your fishmonger when shipments arrive so you can plan accordingly.
  • What to look for in whole fish: Clear, bright eyes, firm flesh, and a fresh smell are key signs of good-quality, fresh fish.
  • Clams & mussels should be alive: Avoid any with cracked or broken shells. Give them a gentle tap and if they close or move slowly, they’re still alive and good to use.
  • How to store clams and mussels at home: As soon as you get home, remove them from plastic bags and store them uncovered in a bowl of ice in the refrigerator. If the ice melts, drain and refresh it until you’re ready to cook.
  • Shrimp should look plump and fresh: Tails should be intact, flesh should be firm, and they should smell clean. If needed, be sure to devein shrimp before cooking.
  • Fresh vs previously frozen fish: Previously frozen fish is often frozen at peak freshness is a great option. What you want to avoid is repeated thawing and refreezing, which causes fish to lose moisture, and affect its texture.

Hosting and Make-Ahead Tips

A little planning goes a long way with a seafood-focused menu.

  • Prep the seafood ahead of time. Cleaning and soaking clams and mussels takes longer than cooking them. Here's how to clean clams to get all the sand out.
  • Prep what you can ahead: Chilled seafood, sauces, and salad components can be prepped earlier in the day so you’re not juggling everything at once.
  • Save the showstopper for last: Cook your main dish closer to serving time so it arrives hot and at its best.
  • Let guests help: If you’re hosting a larger group, invite guests to bring an appetizer or side.

Wine Pairings

These options work beautifully across multiple dishes.

  • Sparkling Wine: A dry Prosecco, Cava, or Champagne is festive and pairs well with everything from shellfish to pasta.
  • Crisp White Wines: Look for wines with good acidity, such as:
    • Pinot Grigio
    • Vermentino
    • Sauvignon Blanc
  • Light-Bodied Reds (Optional): If your menu includes tomato-based seafood dishes, a light red like Pinot Noir or a chilled Italian red can work nicely.

Baked Clams Casino

Dec 16, 2025 · 8 Comments

Baked clams casino is loaded with clams, breadcrumbs and bright lemon zest to bring it all together.

Baked clams casino is a seafood classic. Fresh clams are steamed until just opened and stuffed with a flavorful mixture of sautéed shallots, peppers, panko, and Parmesan cheese. They are golden, briny, completely irresistible, and you won't be able to stop at just one!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Stuffed clams casino with parmesan cheese and fresh herbs.

About This Recipe

Clams casino is a beloved Italian-American seafood appetizer where fresh clams are steamed just until they open, then generously stuffed with a savory, aromatic breadcrumb filling. Sautéed shallots, bell pepper, garlic, and herbs are combined with panko, Parmesan, and extra canned clams for layers of flavor and plenty of seafood in every bite.

The secret weapon here is reserved clam liquid, saved from steaming the clams or from the canned clams. It keeps the stuffing moist and intensifies that briny clam flavor without overpowering the dish. Once filled, the clams are baked until lightly golden and finished with a final shower of Parmesan for a crisp, irresistible topping.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for baked clams casino including panko breadcrumbs, canned clams, garlic, shallot, parsley and bell peppers.

The clam stuffing is what makes this recipe so delicious!

  • Fresh Clams: Littleneck or similar—look for larger shells that are easier to stuff.
  • Canned Clams: For even more clam meat! I love this brand of canned clams and use it in my linguine and clams recipe as well.
  • Reserved Clam Liquid: Save some from steaming the clams or use the juice from the canned clams.
  • Aromatics: Shallots, bell pepper, garlic and thyme.
  • Panko Breadcrumbs: To bind and provide texture.
  • Parmesan Cheese: Offers savoriness. Grate your own if you have a chunk of Parmesan.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • All Canned Clams: Skip fresh clams entirely and use canned clams for the filling, then spoon the mixture into reserved clam shells or small ramekins.
  • Add Bacon or Pancetta: Finely dice and sauté until crisp before adding the aromatics for a smoky, salty bite.
  • Herb Variations: Swap thyme for oregano or parsley for a more Italian‑leaning profile.
  • Cheese Options: Pecorino Romano can be used for a sharper finish.

How to Clean Clams

Before we get into the steaming, let's talk about how to properly clean clams first. It takes longer to clean clams than to cook them, but it's worth it so you don’t bite into a hard piece of sand.

  • Once you bring home the clams, place the clams on ice and leave in the fridge until you’re ready to cook later (usually on the same day).
  • 30 minutes before you’re ready to cook, place the clams in a large bowl of cold tap water. This help the clams spit out any sand that may be inside.
  • Right when you’re ready to cook, use a Shellfish scrubber or something similar to scrub the outside of each clam. Then, you’re ready to cook!

⏲️ Instructions

Steam the fresh clams in white wine until they open up.

Steam the Clams: Add clams to a small pot with white wine and water. Bring to a simmer, cover, and cook until clams just open, about 7–9 minutes.

Once the clams are cooked, separate the clam halves and remove the cooked clam from the shell.

Remove Clam Meat: Remove clams from the pot and reserve the cooking liquid. Let clams cool slightly, then scoop out the clam meat, give it a rough chop, and add to a mixing bowl.

Use a tablespoon to stuff each halved clam shell with the clam mixture.

Mix Filling and Stuff the Clams: Add the sautéed aromatics to clams along with panko, Parmesan, lemon zest, and parsley and mix well. Add clam liquid, as needed, and generously stuff clam shells.

Serve the finished baked clams casino with fresh lemon wedges.

Bake the Clams: Generously pack the clam mixture into each clam shell and bake for 18–20 minutes, until the tops are lightly golden. Finish with olive oil, grated Parmesan, and parsley. Serve warm with lemon wedges.

How to Make Clams Casino (Video)

A Few Tips on Cooking with Clams

  • Discard Damaged Clams: Throw away any clams that are cracked or don’t open after cooking.
  • Don’t Overcook: Turn off the heat as soon as the clams open to keep them tender.
  • Pack the Filling: Don’t be shy—really mound and gently pack the stuffing into each clam.
  • Size Matters: Larger clams are easier to stuff and make for better presentation.
  • Best the Same Day: Clams are at their peak when cooked the day they’re purchased.
Baked clams casino are stuffed clams with a stuffing made up of clams, breadcrumbs, herbs, bell pepper and parmesan cheese.

Serving Suggestions

  • Serve as part of a Feast of the Seven Fishes menu alongside shrimp oreganata, halibut piccata, or whole roasted branzino.
  • Add to an Italian seafood spread with shrimp scampi, calamari, or mussels.
  • Pair with an Italian charcuterie board for a holiday appetizer or cocktail‑party spread.

More Shellfish Recipes to Try

  • This cioppino recipe is full of abundant seafood with clams, mussels and lobster in a flavorful tomato broth.
    Classic Cioppino (Seafood and Tomato Stew)
  • Steamed clams in white wine with garlic.
    Steamed Clams with White Wine and Garlic
  • The Ultimate Paella
  • Mussels mariniere recipe from Julia Child.
    Mussels in White Wine Sauce

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Baked clams casino is loaded with clams, breadcrumbs and bright lemon zest to bring it all together.
Print Recipe
5 from 15 votes

Baked Clams Casino

Baked clams casino is a seafood classic. Fresh clams are steamed until just barely opened and then stuffed with a flavorful mixture of sautéed shallots, peppers, panko and Parmesan cheese. You won't be able to stop at just one!
Prep Time40 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Side Dish
Cuisine: American, Italian
Keyword: clams casino, stuffed clams
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 289kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • Chef Knife
  • Shellfish Scrubber
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Microplane

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds littleneck clams larger ones, if possible
  • ½ cup white wine
  • ½ cup water
  • Olive oil for sautéing and finishing
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 small shallot minced
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and diced
  • 3 garlic cloves minced
  • 2-3 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 2 6 ounces canned clams drained and liquid reserved
  • 1 cup panko breadcrumbs
  • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese + more for garnish
  • Zest of 1 lemon save the rest for wedges
  • 2 tablespoons reserved clam liquid
  • Chopped Parsley leaves for garnish

Instructions

  • Prep the Clams: Soak clams in cold water for at least 30 minutes to release any sand. When ready to cook, scrub the shells well and transfer clams to a clean bowl.
  • Steam the Clams: Add clams to a small pot with white wine and water. Bring to a simmer, cover, and cook until clams just open, about 7–9 minutes.
  • Remove clams from the pot and reserve the cooking liquid. Let clams cool slightly, then seperate the clam shells and keep them. You'll use them for stuffing.
  • Scoop out the clam meat, give it a rough chop, and add to a mixing bowl.
  • Sauté the Aromatics: Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Heat a small skillet over medium heat. Melt butter with a drizzle of olive oil, then sauté shallots and bell pepper until just softened, about 3–4 minutes.
  • Add garlic and thyme and cook for another 30–60 seconds until fragrant.
  • Make the Stuffing: Add the sautéed aromatics to the chopped fresh clams along with the canned clams, panko, Parmesan, lemon zest, and a handful of chopped parsley.
  • Mix well, then add 2–3 tablespoons reserved clam liquid, just until the mixture is moist but not wet.
  • Stuff & Bake: Generously pack the clam mixture into each clam shell and arrange on a baking sheet.
  • Bake for 18–20 minutes, until the tops are lightly golden.
  • Finish & Serve: Remove clams from the oven and finish with a drizzle of olive oil, freshly grated Parmesan, and remaining chopped parsley. Serve warm with lemon wedges.

Video

Notes

  • Discard Damaged Clams: Throw away any clams that are cracked or don’t open after cooking.
  • Don’t Overcook: Turn off the heat as soon as the clams open to keep them tender.
  • Pack the Filling: Don’t be shy—really mound and gently pack the stuffing into each clam.
  • Size Matters: Larger clams are easier to stuff and make for better presentation.
  • Best the Same Day: Clams are at their peak when cooked the day they’re purchased.
For another Seafood recipe with an Italian spin, try my Halibut Piccata or my Lemon Tuscan Shrimp Pasta.

Nutrition

Calories: 289kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 542mg | Potassium: 188mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 198mg | Iron: 2mg

Mediterranean Octopus Salad with Olives and Fennel

Dec 15, 2025 · 2 Comments

Mediterranean octopus salad with olives in a lemon vinaigrette.

This Mediterranean octopus salad is bright, fresh, and full of bold flavors! Tender octopus is tossed with shaved fennel, buttery green olives, fresh herbs, and a vibrant lemon-garlic vinaigrette. It’s briny, citrusy, and a little spicy, and makes a beautiful seafood appetizer or a standout addition to a festive seafood spread.

Mediterranean octopus salad with fennel and olives in a lemon vinaigrette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This Mediterranean octopus salad is full of fresh, vibrant flavors. Octopus tentacles are gently simmered in an aromatic broth until perfectly tender, then tossed with shaved fennel, Castelvetrano olives, fresh herbs, and a bright lemon vinaigrette.

If you’ve ever felt intimidated by cooking a whole octopus, tentacles are a great place to start. They’re easier to work with, cook evenly, and still deliver that tender, meaty texture octopus is known for.

This salad is a fantastic addition to a Feast of the Seven Fishes, Christmas Eve dinner, or any time you’re looking for a light seafood appetizer. Once the octopus is cooked and tender, everything else comes together quickly with layers of bright Mediterranean flavors.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for Mediterranean octopus salad with pickled peppers, green olives, fennel and fresh herbs.
  • Octopus Tentacles: You can usually find these frozen in the seafood section, and they’re much easier to work with than a whole octopus. Just thaw, simmer until tender, and you’re good to go.
  • Fennel: Shaved thin, fennel adds a crisp texture and subtle licorice flavor that pairs beautifully with seafood and citrus.
  • Castelvetrano Olives: Buttery, mild green olives that won’t overpower the salad. Roughly chopping them keeps the texture rustic.
  • Spicy Pickled Peppers: I used jarred pickled peppers called Mama Lil’s, which add a touch of heat, sweetness, and acidity. Roasted red peppers work well if you prefer no spice.
  • Fresh Herbs (Parsley & Oregano): Parsley keeps things bright and fresh, while oregano adds an earthy Mediterranean note.
  • Extra-Virgin Olive Oil: Use a good-quality olive oil since the dressing is simple and really shines.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Add or substitute seafood: Boiled shrimp (small–medium) or gently cooked scallops are excellent additions or swaps.
  • Olives: If Castelvetrano olives aren’t available, use another green olive or even Kalamata olives for a brinier and stronger flavor.
  • Peppers: Swap spicy pickled peppers for roasted sweet red peppers if you prefer no heat.
  • Fennel substitute: Thinly sliced celery works if fennel isn’t available, though fennel is so delicious with seafood.
  • Herbs: If fresh herbs aren’t available, use ½ teaspoon each dried parsley and dried oregano.
  • Citrus twist: Try blood orange or grapefruit juice in place of some of the lemon.

⏲️ Instructions

Simmer the octopus tentacles in the aromatic broth.

Simmer the Octopus: Add the octopus tentacles to a pot with the shallot, herbs, garlic, bay leaves, peppercorns, white wine, and water. Bring to a gentle simmer and cook until tender, keeping the liquid just below a boil.

Cook the octopus tentacles until tender and easily pierced with a fork.

Cook Until Tender: Once cooked, remove the octopus from the broth and let it cool slightly. To check for doneness, slide a paring knife into the thickest part of the tentacle. It should go in easily without resistance.

Mix the cooked octopus with the vinaigrette, olives, pickled peppers and herbs.

Assemble: Slice the octopus into bite-size pieces and add to a bowl with the shaved fennel, olives, pickled peppers, fresh herbs, and lemon vinaigrette. Toss gently to combine.

Serve the marinated octopus salad in a wide platter and garnish with fresh herbs.

Finish & Serve: Transfer the salad to a serving platter and garnish with extra fresh herbs. Serve chilled or at room temperature for the best flavor.

How to Make Octopus Salad (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Octopus cook time varies. Not all octopus cooks at the same time, depending on how thick the tentacles are. Use a paring knife to check the thicker part of the octopus. If it slides in easily, it’s ready.
  • Maintain a gentle simmer. Too low and it won’t tenderize, and if the heat is too high, the octopus can get tough.
  • Remove the outer membrane. Some octopus develops a slippery outer layer after cooking. Once done, use a paring knife to gently peel away the outer slippery layer before chopping.
  • Make ahead. This salad is best made the day before serving. It will keep for up to 2 days in the fridge.
  • Bring to room temp before serving. Olive oil solidifies when cold. When ready to serve, let it warm slightly to bring everything back together.
This chilled octopus salad is full of bright Mediterranean flavors with olives, fennel, bright lemon and spicy pickled peppers.

Serving Suggestions

This octopus salad is perfect as part of a Feast of the Seven Fishes alongside:

  • Linguine with Clams
  • Mussels with Marinara
  • Shrimp Oreganata
  • Halibut Piccata

It also pairs beautifully with crusty bread, whipped feta, or other Mediterranean mezze.
For wine, serve alongside Sauvignon Blanc, Pinot Grigio, or another crisp, citrusy white.

More Seafood Recipes to Try

  • Easy French seafood stew with shrimp, mussels, clams and halibut.
    Simple Bouillabaisse Recipe (French Seafood Stew)
  • Inspired by a New Orleans favorite, these charbroiled oysters are cooked with paprika herb butter and topped with Parmesan cheese and lemon.
    Charbroiled Oysters with Garlic Butter and Parmesan
  • Spanish Garlic Shrimp with Paprika and Lemon
    Spanish Garlic Shrimp with Paprika and Lemon (Gambas al Ajillo)
  • Assemble the best seafood platter with chilled clams, oysters, seared tuna and crab legs.
    Chilled Seafood Platter

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Mediterranean octopus salad with olives in a lemon vinaigrette.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Mediterranean Octopus Salad with Olives and Fennel

This bright and briny octopus salad is layered with shaved fennel, Castelvetrano olives, herbs, and tossed with a lemon garlic vinaigrette. Everything you want in a Mediterranean seafood salad and perfect as an appetizer too.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr
Chilling20 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 35 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: chilled octopus salad, Mediterranean octopus salad, octopus salad with olives
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 193kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls
  • Mandolin
  • Chef Knife

Ingredients

For Cooking the Octopus

  • 9 ounces–1 pound octopus tentacles thawed
  • 1 shallot halved
  • 2 bay leaves
  • Small bunch of parsley
  • 2 garlic cloves smashed
  • 8 whole peppercorns
  • ½ cup white wine
  • 3-4 cups water enough to cover
  • Good pinch of salt

For the Salad

  • ½ small fennel bulb shaved very thin
  • ½ small red onion shaved very thin
  • ¼ cup spicy pickled peppers such as Mama Lil’s, chopped
  • ½ cup pitted Castelvetrano olives roughly chopped
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves chopped
  • 1-2 tablespoons fresh oregano leaves chopped

Lemon Vinaigrette

  • ¼ cup extra-virgin olive oil
  • Juice of 1 lemon
  • 2 garlic cloves finely grated
  • Kosher salt and black pepper to taste
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Cook the Octopus: Add the shallot, bay leaves, parsley, garlic, peppercorns, white wine, salt, and water to a medium pot. Bring to a gentle simmer.
  • Add the octopus tentacles and keep the liquid at a steady simmer (not boiling). Cook for 40 minutes to 1 hour, checking every 10 minutes after the 40-minute mark.
  • To test for doneness, insert a paring knife into the thickest part of the tentacle. If it slides in easily, it’s ready. If it bounces back or resists, continue cooking another 10–15 minutes and check again.
  • Clean the Octopus: Once tender, remove the octopus and let it cool until safe to handle.
  • If there is any slimy outer membrane, gently scrape or peel it off using a paring knife or spoon. Rinse briefly under cold water if needed and pat dry. Slice the octopus into ½-inch pieces.
  • Make the Salad: In a large bowl, combine the chopped octopus, shaved fennel and onion, pickled peppers, olives, parsley, and oregano.
  • Make the Vinaigrette: Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, grated garlic, salt, and pepper.
  • Assemble: Pour the vinaigrette over the salad and toss gently to combine. Taste and adjust seasoning as needed.
  • Chill: Let the salad marinate for at least 20 minutes before serving. Longer is even better.

Video

Notes

  • Octopus cook time can vary depending on thickness. Start checking for doneness after 40 minutes by sliding a paring knife into the thickest part and should go in easily.
  • Keep the cooking liquid at a gentle simmer. Too low won’t tenderize properly, and boiling can make the octopus tough.
  • If a slippery outer membrane forms after cooking, gently peel or scrape it off before slicing.
  • This salad tastes even better after resting. Make it ahead and let it marinate for at least 20 minutes or up to 1 day.
  • If chilled, bring to room temperature before serving so the olive oil loosens and flavors shine.

Nutrition

Calories: 193kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 409mg | Potassium: 230mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 479IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 1mg

Beef Arayes (Lebanese Meat-Stuffed Pitas)

Dec 12, 2025 · 2 Comments

These Middle Eastern stuffed pitas are filled with a flavorful beef mixture and topped with sumac onions, creamy tahini sauce and herbs.

These beef arayes are Lebanese meat-stuffed pitas loaded with a bold, herbaceous mixture, then cooked until perfectly golden and crisp on the outside. Finished with creamy tahini sauce, crunchy sumac onions, and a drizzle of tangy pomegranate molasses. Every bite is savory, juicy, crispy, and full of big Middle Eastern flavors!

These beef arayes are pitas filled with a flavorful ground beef mixture. Once cooked, they are topped with pickled onions, tahini sauce and herbs.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Beef arayes are delicious Lebanese meat-stuffed pitas with roots across the Levant. They’re filled with a kofta-style blend of ground beef, warm spices, and fresh herbs, then pan-fried until perfectly golden and crisp.

These make a fantastic weeknight dinner, and because I can never resist fun toppings, finish them with a generous drizzle of creamy tahini sauce, crunchy pickled sumac onions, and tangy pomegranate molasses. The combination of savory beef, crisp pita, bright onions and creamy tahini is unbelievably delicious!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for beef arayes, including pita bread, spices, ground beef, onion and fresh herbs.
  • Ground Beef: Use a ground beef mixture with 80% lean / 20% fat ratio. This keeps the filling juicy and flavorful without drying out.
  • Spices: (Paprika, Cumin, Coriander, Turmeric, Cinnamon, Sumac, Aleppo Pepper): This warm, aromatic blend gives the meat its signature Middle Eastern flavor. Learn more about Mediterranean Spices here!
  • Aromatics: Onion, Garlic & parsley is pulsed finely so they blend well into the beef mixture.
  • Pita Bread: Look for thicker, sturdier pitas so they hold the filling without tearing. Or if you feel ambitious, there is nothing like homemade pita bread.
  • Pomegranate molasses: This condiment is used throughout Middle Eastern cooking. It’s reduced pomegranate juice with a tart and slightly sweet flavor and pairs wonderfully with ground beef and spices.
  • Sumac Onion Salad: This salad is popular in Mediterranean cooking and often added to meat dishes. It's made by mixing thinly slice onions with lemon and sumac.
  • Tahini Sauce: Look for a good-quality pourable tahini to make tahini sauce. It adds a delicious creamy and nutty addition.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Protein: Use a mixture of half beef and lamb, all ground lamb, or ground dark meat chicken.
  • Spices: If you don’t have the full list, use what you have. A combo of cumin, coriander, and paprika will still taste amazing.
  • Sumac: If you’re out of sumac, add a little fresh lemon zest for brightness.
  • Pomegranate molasses: A thick, aged balsamic glaze can work in a pinch. It’ll be sweeter but still adds tang.
  • Pita: Any thicker pita works. If yours are very large, cut them into quarters.

⏲️ Instructions

Use a food processor to finely chop onion, garlic and herbs before adding to the ground beef.

Pulse the aromatics: Add onion, garlic, and parsley to a food processor and pulse until very finely chopped. Drain any excess liquid.

Mix the ground beef, chopped herbs and onions and spices together. This will be the ground beef mixture for the arayes.

Mix the filling: Add the onion mixture to a bowl with the ground beef, spices, salt, and pepper. Gently mix until evenly combined.

Fill the pita halves evenly with the ground beef mixture.

Stuff the pitas: Cut pitas in half and gently open the pockets. Divide the meat mixture among the pita halves, pressing it in evenly without overfilling.

Once you cook the beef stuffed pitas, sear the ends so the meat and pita adhere.

Sear until golden: Heat olive oil in a skillet over medium heat. Sear pitas on both sides and use tongs to sear the cut edge as well.

How to Make Beef Arayes (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Choose thicker pita bread: Thin pitas can tear once stuffed. Thicker pitas or fresh pitas hold up best.
  • Don’t overfill the pita: Divide the mixture among the pitas evenly. You want them about ½–¾ inch thick so they cook through without breaking the pita bread.
  • Pulse the aromatics finely: Use a food processor to pulse the aromatics to avoid large chunks of vegetables in the meat mixture. You can also use a knife and finely chop the best you can. Or use a box grater for the onion and garlic, just be sure to drain any liquid before adding to the meat mixture.
  • Don’t overmix the meat: Mix until just combined to keep the texture tender.
  • Sear all sides: Sear both the flat side of the stuffed pita, as well as the cut edge. This gives the arayes that signature golden, crispy bite.
  • Make-ahead: Cook the beef arayes fully, then reheat in a 325-350°F oven until warmed through. Add toppings right before serving so nothing gets soggy.
Middle Eastern beef arayes topped with pickled sumac onions, creamy tahini sauce and fresh herbs.

Serving Suggestions

These beef arayes are fantastic for a weeknight dinner but also fun for entertaining. Keep the toppings and dips separate so everyone can assemble their own.

Serve along side:

  • Lebanese potato salad with sumac
  • Tabbouleh
  • Kale, Apple and feta salad
  • Israeli chopped salad
  • Dips like whipped feta or hummus
  • Fresh herbs and lemon wedges on the side

More Beef Recipes to Try

  • Jewish style sweet and sour meatballs in a sweet and tangy tomato sauce.
    Jewish-Style Sweet and Sour Meatballs
  • Roasted acorn squash stuffed with spiced rice and ground beef.
    Stuffed Acorn Squash with Ground Beef and Spiced Rice (Hashweh)
  • Turkish stuffed onions stuffed with a flavorful meat and rice mixture and cooked in a robust tomato sauce.
    Turkish Stuffed Onions
  • Turkish Kofta Kebab (Grilled Beef and Lamb Skewers)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

These Middle Eastern stuffed pitas are filled with a flavorful beef mixture and topped with sumac onions, creamy tahini sauce and herbs.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Beef Arayes (Lebanese Meat Stuffed Pitas)

Beef arayes are delicious Middle Eastern stuffed pitas and seared until golden. Top with tahini and other toppings for a bold, flavorful meal.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time30 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Middle Eastern
Keyword: arayes recipe, beef arayes, meat stuffed pita
Servings: 5 stuffed pitas
Calories: 339kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Cast Iron Skillet

Ingredients

For the Meat Filling:

  • 1 small onion cut into chunks
  • 3 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • Small bunch of parsley about ½ cup packed
  • 1 pound ground beef 80–85% lean
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon sumac
  • ½ teaspoon Aleppo pepper

For Assembling:

  • 3-4 pita breads cut in half
  • Olive oil for brushing

For Serving:

  • Tahini sauce for drizzling or dipping
  • Pomegranate molasses for drizzling
  • Sumac-pickled onions
  • Fresh herbs parsley, mint, or cilantro
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the filling: Add the onion, garlic, and parsley to a small food processor. Pulse until finely minced.
  • If mixture is too wet, transfer the mixture to a fine mesh sieve or cheesecloth and press to remove excess moisture.
  • Mix the beef: In a large bowl, combine the onion mixture with the ground beef and all the spices; paprika, cumin, coriander, cinnamon, sumac, Aleppo pepper, and salt. Mix with your hands until evenly combined, but don’t overmix.
  • Assemble the arayes: Stuff each pita half with the beef mixture, spreading it evenly so it’s about ½-3/4 inch thick throughout. Don’t overfill or the pita can tear.
  • Cook: Heat a cast-iron skillet or grill pan over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Cook the stuffed pita for 3–4 minutes per side, pressing slightly until golden and crisp. Then, stand each pita upright and sear the cut side for another minute or so, until it’s deeply golden and the edges are crisp.
  • Serve: Drizzle stuffed pitas with tahini sauce, pomegranate molasses, and top with sumac-pickled onions and herbs.

Video

Notes

  • Use thicker, sturdier pita so it doesn’t tear once stuffed.
  • Don’t overfill and keep the meat layer about ½–¾ inch thick so it cooks evenly.
  • Pulse onion, garlic, and parsley finely (or grate if needed) and drain excess liquid.
  • Mix the meat gently to keep the texture tender.
  • To make ahead, cook fully, then reheat at 325–350°F until warmed through. Add toppings just before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 339kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 64mg | Sodium: 712mg | Potassium: 351mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 263IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 64mg | Iron: 3mg

Hanukkah Dinner Party Menu

Dec 11, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Host a festive and delicious Hanukkah dinner party, with appetizers, mains and fun games to play,

Hanukkah is all about celebrating the miracle of oil and gathering with friends and family, and of course… plenty of fried food! This Hanukkah menu brings together traditional favorites and fun twists, with a few playful touches to set the mood.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍴Appetizers

Classic Potato Latkes: It wouldn't be a Hanukkah party without Mom's Classic Potato Latkes! Or if you feel a bit more creative, have fun with Salt and Vinegar Potato Latkes or make a Latke Bar with different toppings to choose from.

Potato latkes on a place and topped with sour cream and apple sauce and microgreens.

Chicken Liver Pâté (Optional): Chopped liver or chicken liver pâté is often seen around Jewish holiday dinners. This version brings in bright Mediterranean flavors with lemon zest, capers and fresh herbs.

Serve with crackers, crostini or top a dollop onto latkes.

Chicken liver pâté with capers, lemon and herbs.

🍽️ Main Dish Options

Pomegranate Braised Short Ribs (Meat Option): Rich, tender, deeply flavorful short ribs braised with sweet and tangy pomegranate and red wine. Serve over creamy sweet potatoes for a stunning holiday main course.

Serve the pomegranate short ribs over creamy sweet potatoes and garnish with pomegranate and herbs.

Herb Crusted Salmon (Seafood Option): A bright mixture of lemon juice, white wine and fresh herbs coats the salmon beautifully. The result is a tender, bright seafood main that everyone loves!

Fresh herb and lemon crusted salmon recipe.

🥗 Side Dishes

Roasted Carrots with Pomegranate and Pears: Colorful, lightly sweet, and beautiful next to the braised short ribs. Look for rainbow carrots for a striking side dish.

Pomegranate roasted carrots with pears and pomegranate molasses.

Kale Tabbouleh with Pomegranate and Quinoa: Kale tabbouleh is a twist on the popular Mediterranean salad, with nutty quinoa that is tossed with a tangy pomegranate vinaigrette.

🍩 Dessert

Donuts aka sufganiyot are a must for the Hanukkah season!

Pear Donuts with Vanilla and Cinnamon: Sweet pears are cooked down with brown sugar, vanilla and cinnamon, then piped into perfectly pillowy fried donuts.

Pear donuts are piled on a plate and dusted with powdered sugar.

🍷 Drink Pairings

Pomegranate Red Wine Sangria: This is such a good option for a batch cocktail! Just keep it chilled and add sparkling water before serving for a little fizz.

Pear and pomegranate red wine sangria in two glasses.

Wine Suggestions

  • For Short Ribs: A medium-bodied red like Pinot Noir or Merlot complements the richness and sweet-sour notes of the pomegranate braised short ribs.
  • For Salmon: A crisp, citrusy white such as Sauvignon Blanc or Chablis balances the fresh herbs and lemon in the herb-crusted salmon.

Non-Alcoholic Option

  • Jallab (Date & Molasses Drink): Lightly sweet and floral, this Middle Eastern drink pairs beautifully with fried latkes and rich mains.
  • Or simply sparkling water with a splash of pomegranate juice and add a twist of citrus.
A floral and refreshing Middle Eastern drink inspired from Lebanon, Jallab is made with date molasses, a touch of rose mater and topped with pine nuts.

🎉 Fun Extras for the Table

  • Dreidel Game: Classic, easy, and fun for all ages! Learn how to play dreidel and what the letters mean.
  • Scatter gelt on the table and to use during the dreidel game.
  • Menorah Lighting: If it’s one of the nights of Hanukkah, lighting the menorah together is a simple way to honor the holiday and create a warm, festive atmosphere.

📋 Make-Ahead Tips

  • Short Ribs: Make 1–2 days ahead, so they get even better as they sit.
  • Latkes: Fry earlier in the day or day before and reheat on a wire rack in the oven until warmed through.
  • Pâté: Can be made the day before.
  • Salads: Prep components ahead; toss right before serving.
  • Dessert fritters: Best served fresh, but the batter can be made ahead of time.

Braised Sweet and Sour Brisket

Dec 9, 2025 · 6 Comments

Braised beef brisket in a rich sweet and sour tomato sauce.

This tender, melt-in-your-mouth braised brisket is everything you want in a well-made brisket. The sweet and sour brisket is braised in a tangy and rich sauce that glazes over the brisket beautifully.

Braised sweet and sour brisket in a tomato and red wine based sauce.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

A well-made braised brisket is often the star of the show at most Jewish holiday dinners. I have fond memories of enjoying slices of sweet and sour brisket during our Passover seders and Hanukkah dinners. Though brisket is good any time of the year.

This sweet and sour brisket is inspired by my mom's sweet and sour sauce and the results are melt-in-your-mouth delicious! This version braises low and slow in a Dutch oven so the tangy sauce thickens perfectly, or make slow cooker red wine brisket for even more hands off-cooking.

For the perfect pairing serve alongside Celery Root Latkes or go classic with Mom's Crispy Potato Latkes, a fresh shredded kale salad on the side or with lemony matzo ball soup as a first course.

Brisket 101 (a.k.a. Let’s Talk Brisket)

Brisket is a substantial cut of beef, usually anywhere from 3 to 8 pounds. You can buy a whole brisket or choose between two main cuts:

  • Flat Cut (aka First Cut): This is the cut used for this Jewish-style brisket. It has a fat cap on one side with very little marbling throughout, which means it needs low and slow braise to stay tender.
  • Point Cut (aka Second Cut): This cut has more inter-muscular fat, so it’s richer and more flavorful, but it won’t slice quite as neatly as the flat cut.

For more on cuts and butchery, check out WA State Beef Commission.

Cooked braised brisket in a large dutch oven served in a sweet and sour tomato sauce.

Ingredients

  • Brisket: 3 to 5 pound flat cut brisket. Do not trim any fat as this cut needs the fat to keep the meat tender.
  • Salt and Pepper: This is a good hunk of meat so don't be shy with the salt.
  • Tomato Paste: A few tablespoons of tomato paste thickens the initial sauce and creates a lovely sweet flavor.
  • Paprika: Use either sweet paprika for a more mild flavor or smoked paprika for a smokier flavor. Tip: Add the spices when you saute the tomato paste to wake up the flavors.
  • Red Wine: A red blend or Cabernet can handle the robust brisket.
  • Tomato Sauce: Either unseasoned tomato sauce, tomato puree or strained tomatoes is perfect for this recipe.
  • Worcestershire Sauce: Optional, but a few dashes gives a great savory element to the sauce.
  • Beef Stock: I like using a beef stock base that I can add water to, such as Better Than Bouillon.
  • Brown Sugar: This is what gives the sweet flavor in the sweet and sour sauce.
  • Lemon Juice: My mom swore by using "sour salt", which is citric acid. But lemon juice works just as well and is what gives the sour flavor to the sauce.

How To Make Sweet and Sour Brisket

Drizzle a wide dutch oven with oil and sear the brisket.

Season and Sear the First Side: Place the seasoned brisket into a hot Dutch oven and sear the first side until deeply browned.

Sear the brisket on all sides, including the ends so a deep crust forms.

Sear All Sides: Turn brisket over and sear the other side. Use tongs to hold it upright and sear the ends.

Saute sliced onions in the same dutch oven for a few minutes to soften.

Remove Brisket and Sauté Onions: Transfer the brisket to a plate. In the same Dutch oven, sauté the onions until they soften and begin to caramelize.

Reduce the red wine until thickened.

Build the Sauce: Add the spices and tomato paste, then pour in the wine. Let the mixture simmer and reduce to concentrate the flavor.

Add the seared brisket back into the dutch oven with the reduced wine sauce.

Nestle Brisket Back Into the Pot: Return the seared brisket to the Dutch oven and spoon some of the sauce over the top before braising.

After the brisket is cooked, it will shrink a bit and sauce will reduce.

Cook Until Tender: Cook brisket in the oven until tender and the sauce has reduced. The meat should be tender enough to pierce easily with a fork.

Brisket Making Tips

  • Bring to room temperature: Let the brisket sit out for at least 30 minutes before cooking to remove the chill.
  • Pat it dry: A dry surface helps the brisket get a deep, even sear.
  • Sear every side: Don’t rush this step, searing all sides builds essential flavor.
  • Leave the fat on: The fat cap helps keep the brisket tender. You can skim excess fat from the sauce after cooking.
  • Cook until just tender: The brisket is ready when a fork pierces it easily and releases without resistance.
  • Even better the next day: Slice the cooked brisket and store it in the sauce; it reheats beautifully and tastes even richer after resting.
Braised Jewish style brisket sliced and placed back in the dutch oven with a rich sweet and sour sauce.
Can I make braised brisket ahead of time?

Braised brisket is one of those dishes that taste better as it sits. To make ahead, braise the brisket until tender, then slice and place the sliced brisket back into the sauce. Let the sauce come to room temperature, then chill and when ready, reheat the brisket in the sauce on the stovetop.

Serving Suggestions

Sweet and sour brisket is incredibly versatile and pairs well with just about anything! Serve it with lemon matzo ball soup as a starter or alongside garlic mashed potatoes to soak up all that tangy sauce. A bright green salad or roasted Brussels sprouts also balance the richness beautifully.

If you have any leftovers, and that's a BIG IF, you can make my Brisket Tacos with Pickled Onions or my Brisket Empanadas with Passion Fruit Chimichurri.

More Brisket Recipes to Try

  • Slow Cooker Cuban Inspired Brisket with Sazon and Chiles
  • Brisket empanada served with bright green passion fruit chimichurri.
    Brisket Empanadas with Passion Fruit Chimichurri
  • Red wine slow cooker brisket with onions.
    Slow Cooker Brisket with Red Wine and Onions
  • Brisket Tacos with Pickled Onions

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Braised beef brisket in a rich sweet and sour tomato sauce.
Print Recipe
4.88 from 8 votes

Sweet and Sour Braised Brisket

This tender brisket is everything you want in a Jewish style brisket. The sweet and sour brisket is braised in a tangy and rich tomato sauce that glazes over the meat beautifully.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time3 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Resting Time10 minutes mins
Total Time4 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main, Main Course
Cuisine: Jewish
Keyword: braised brisket, Jewish style brisket, sweet and sour brisket
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 572kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $40

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser

Ingredients

  • 3 ½-4 pound brisket
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil more if needed
  • 1 yellow or white onion sliced thin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • ¾ cup red wine such as Cabernet
  • 15 ounce tomato sauce
  • ¼ cup brown sugar
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 2-3 dashes Worcestershire
  • 2 cups beef stock
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 300°F.
  • Sear the Brisket: Pat the brisket very dry with paper towels and season generously with salt and pepper.
  • Heat a wide Dutch oven over medium-high heat and add olive oil. Sear the brisket on all sides until a deep crust forms, then remove and set aside.
  • Sauté the Onions: Add a little more oil if needed, then add the sliced onions and sauté until softened, about 2–3 minutes.
  • Build the Sauce: Stir in the paprika and tomato paste and sauté for another 30 seconds, breaking down the tomato paste into the oil.
  • Pour in the red wine and scrape up any browned bits with a spatula. Let the wine reduce for 2–3 minutes until thickened.
  • Braise: Return the brisket to the pot, fat side up and any accumulated juices.
  • In a bowl, whisk together the tomato sauce, beef stock, Worcestershire, brown sugar, and lemon juice and pour the mixture over and around the brisket.
  • Bring the mixture to a boil, then cover and transfer to a 300°F oven.
  • Braise for 3–3½ hours, or until the brisket is fork-tender and the sauce has thickened.
  • Slice & Serve: Transfer the brisket to a cutting board and rest for 10 minutes.
  • Slice against the grain, then nestle the slices back into the sauce. Spoon sauce over the top and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Bring to room temperature: Let the brisket sit out for at least 30 minutes before cooking to remove the chill.
  • Pat it dry: A dry surface helps the brisket get a deep, even sear.
  • Sear every side: Don’t rush this step — searing all sides builds essential flavor.
  • Leave the fat on: The fat cap helps keep the brisket tender. You can skim excess fat from the sauce after cooking.
  • Cook until just tender: The brisket is ready when a fork pierces it easily and releases without resistance.
  • Even better the next day: Slice the cooked brisket and store it in the sauce; it reheats beautifully and tastes even richer after resting.
  • For more wonderful beef recipes, try my Grilled Tomahawk Steak with Chimichurri Butter or Cast Iron Steak with Mushrooms.

Nutrition

Calories: 572kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 58g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 164mg | Sodium: 1509mg | Potassium: 1356mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 515IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 6mg

Pomegranate Braised Short Ribs

Dec 4, 2025 · 4 Comments

Tender Pomegranate short ribs are slightly tangy and savory and served over creamy sweet potatoes.

These pomegranate-braised short ribs slowly cook in a rich braising liquid with red wine, warm spices, pomegranate juice, and a touch of tangy pomegranate molasses. The beef becomes tender, with a savory-sweet sauce that’s deeply aromatic. Serve over creamy sweet potatoes and finish with a bright pomegranate gremolata for a comforting main course with a Mediterranean twist.

Tender pomegranate short ribs are4 served over creamy mashed sweet potatoes and garnished with a pomegranate gremolata.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

These pomegranate-braised short ribs are a gorgeous, slow-cooked main dish that’s perfect for the holiday season or any cooler night when you want something rich and aromatic. Bone-in short ribs are deeply browned, then braised with red wine, warm spices, sweet-tart pomegranate juice, and pomegranate molasses. The result is melt-in-your-mouth beef with a sauce that’s rich, tangy, aromatic, and beautifully balanced.

Serve the short ribs over creamy mashed sweet potatoes for a striking main course and finish with a bright pomegranate gremolata with fresh lemon zest and juicy pomegranate seeds. The pop of freshness cuts through the richness perfectly.

And if you love a more classic flavor profile, try my red wine short ribs with parsnip mash that’s always a hit!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for braised pomegranate short ribs, including pomegranate molasses, red wine, warm spices and fresh herbs.
  • Short Ribs: Look for thick, bone-in English-cut or “dinosaur”-cut short ribs. The thicker ones have more meat and become incredibly tender as the fat and connective tissue melt down during the braise.
  • Aromatics (Onion, Carrot, Celery): The classic mirepoix foundation for long braises.
  • Fresh Herbs: A bundle of rosemary, thyme, parsley, and bay leaves. Tie them with butcher’s twine so they’re easy to remove once the braise is done.
  • Warm Spices: Coriander, allspice, and a cinnamon stick are subtle, warm spices that complement the pomegranate and beef without overpowering anything.
  • Pomegranate Molasses: Pomegranate molasses brings a delicious tangy and slightly sweet layer of flavor. If pomegranate molasses is new to you, it’s a pantry staple in my kitchen and used in Mediterranean cooking. Add a drizzle to roasted squash or add to a pomegranate salad dressing.
  • Red Wine: Choose something you enjoy drinking, such as a red table wine or Cabernet. Avoid dessert wines, which can be too sweet for a braise.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Boneless short ribs: Work well, but they cook a bit faster and may need slightly less liquid.
  • No red wine: Replace with additional beef stock and a splash more pomegranate juice.
  • Vegetables: Try shallots or leeks instead of onion and parsnips instead of carrots.
  • No pomegranate molasses: A thick, high-quality balsamic can be used in a pinch (not identical, but gives a similar tangy sweetness).
  • Make it spicier: Add Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes when blooming the spices.

⏲️ Instructions

Pat the short ribs dry and season with salt and pepper on all sides.

Season the Short Ribs. Pat the short ribs dry and season generously with salt and pepper on all sides.

In a wide Dutch oven drizzled with olive oil, sear the short ribs on all sides until deeply browned.

Sear the Short Ribs. Heat olive oil in a large Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Sear the short ribs on all sides until deeply browned, about 3–4 minutes per side. Transfer to a plate.

Remove the seared short ribs from the Dutch oven and saute the chopped vegetables.

Sauté the Aromatics. Add the vegetables and sauté for 4–5 minutes. Add garlic and sauté for 30 seconds, then the tomato paste and cook for 1–2 minutes until it darkens slightly. Add the coriander and allspice and sauté for about 30 seconds.

Add red wine to the sautéed vegetables and simmer to reduce the wine.

Deglaze with Wine. Pour in the red wine to deglaze, scraping up any browned bits from the bottom.

Nestle the seared short ribs back into the Dutch oven and add the braising liquid, red wine, pomegranate molasses and fresh herbs.

Build the Braising Liquid. Return the short ribs to the pot and add beef stock, pomegranate juice, and pomegranate molasses. Nestle in the cinnamon stick, bay leaves, and herb bundle. Bring to a gentle simmer.

Cook the pomegranate short ribs in the oven until the sauce reduces and meat is tender and starts to fall off the bone.

Braise the Short Ribs. Cover and transfer to the oven. Braise for about 2½ hours, until tender.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the meat well. A dry surface creates deep, even browning. Pat the ribs thoroughly with paper towels before seasoning.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan. Sear the ribs in batches, as needed, so they brown and not steam.
  • Check your liquid level. The braising liquid should come at least halfway to ¾ up the ribs. The ribs don't need to be submerged, but still need enough liquid as it will reduce in cooking.
  • Skim excess fat. Once the braise is done, use a spoon to skim the fat that rises to the top. If you want it extra clean, chill the sauce and remove the solidified fat, then reheat.
Braised pomegranate short ribs in a rich red wine and pomegranate sauce.

Serving Suggestions

Serve the pomegranate short ribs over creamy mashed sweet potatoes (recipe below) so the rich sauce drapes over every bite! They’re impressive enough to serve for Christmas, Hanukkah, Rosh Hashanah, or any holiday dinner.

Some sides that pair beautifully:

  • Crispy potato latkes or for more of a pomegranate theme, saffron latkes topped with feta and pomegranate
  • Shredded kale salad with apples, cranberries, and feta
  • Pear and pomegranate sangria- perfect for keeping the pomegranate theme going
  • Sautéed Brussels sprouts with balsamic
  • Wine pairing: Use the same red wine that’s used in the braise, such as Cabernet, Cab Franc, or a robust red table wine.

More Beef Recipes to Try

  • Braised beef brisket in a rich sweet and sour tomato sauce.
    Braised Sweet and Sour Brisket
  • Julia Child French beef bourguignon recipe with mushrooms and red wine.
    Julia Child's Beef Bourguignon
  • Grilled Korean short ribs with rice and kimchi.
    Kalbi Beef (Korean Beef Short Ribs)
  • Steak marsala with mushrooms and herbs.
    Steak Marsala with Mushrooms

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Tender Pomegranate short ribs are slightly tangy and savory and served over creamy sweet potatoes.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Pomegranate Braised Short Ribs

These tender, fall-off-the-bone short ribs are braised in red wine, pomegranate juice, and warm spices for a deep, aromatic flavor. Served over creamy mashed sweet potatoes and topped with a fresh pomegranate gremolata.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time3 hours hrs
Total Time3 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American, Mediterranean
Keyword: pomegranate braised short ribs, pomegranate short ribs
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 720kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • Silicone Spoon Spatula
  • Chef Knife

Ingredients

For the Short Ribs

  • 3 to 4 pounds bone-in beef short ribs
  • Kosher salt and black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 large onion diced
  • 2 carrots chopped into ½- to 1-inch pieces
  • 2 celery stalks chopped into ½-inch pieces
  • 4 garlic cloves sliced
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ¼ teaspoon ground allspice
  • ½ cup dry red wine
  • 2 to 2½ cups beef stock
  • ½ cup pomegranate juice
  • 2 to 3 tablespoons pomegranate molasses
  • 1 cinnamon stick
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 herb bundle rosemary, thyme, and parsley

Pomegranate Gremolata

  • ¼ cup chopped fresh parsley
  • Zest of 1 lemon
  • Pomegranate seeds from about half a pomegranate

Mashed Sweet Potatoes

  • 2 to 3 medium sweet potatoes
  • 2 to 3 tablespoons non-dairy milk such as almond or oat milk
  • Salt and black pepper to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

For the Short Ribs

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Sear the Short Ribs. Pat the short ribs dry and season generously with salt and pepper on all sides.
  • Heat olive oil in a large Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Sear the short ribs on all sides until deeply browned, about 3–4 minutes per side. Transfer to a plate.
  • Sauté the Aromatics. In the same pot, add the onion, carrots, and celery and sauté until softened and golden, about 4–5 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and sauté for 30 seconds. Add the tomato paste and cook for 1–2 minutes until it darkens slightly.
  • Bloom the Spices. Add the coriander and allspice, stirring to bloom the spices in the oil for about 30 seconds.
  • Build the Braising Liquid. Pour in the red wine to deglaze, scraping up any browned bits from the bottom.
  • Return the short ribs to the pot. Add beef stock, pomegranate juice, and pomegranate molasses. The liquid should be about halfway up the ribs.
  • Nestle in the cinnamon stick, bay leaves, and herb bundle. Bring to a gentle simmer.
  • Braise the Short Ribs. Cover and transfer to the oven. Braise for about 2½ hours, or until the ribs are fork-tender and the sauce has reduced.
  • Once done, remove from oven and use a spoon to skim excess fat from the surface. Taste and adjust seasoning as needed.

Creamy Sweet Potatoes

  • Roast the Sweet Potatoes. Cut large ones in half, lengthwise and place on a baking sheet. Roast at 400°F for about 40 minutes, or until fork-tender.
  • Mash the Sweet Potatoes. Once the potatoes are cool enough to handle, scoop out the flesh and mash or blend with non-dairy milk, salt, pepper, and ground cinnamon until smooth and creamy.

To Serve

  • Make the Gremolata. To a bowl, combine chopped parsley, lemon zest, and pomegranate seeds and toss to combine.
  • Assemble. Spread the mashed sweet potatoes on a serving platter and top with the braised short ribs, spooning the vegetables and sauce around them.
  • Garnish generously with the pomegranate gremolata and serve warm.

Notes

  • Dry the meat well. A dry surface creates deep, even browning. Pat the ribs thoroughly with paper towels before seasoning.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan. Sear the ribs in batches, as needed, so they brown and not steam.
  • Check your liquid level. The braising liquid should come at least halfway to ¾ up the ribs. The ribs don/t need to be submerged, but still need enough liquid as it will reduce in cooking.
  • Skim excess fat. Once the braise is done, use a spoon to skim the fat that rises to the top. If you want it extra clean, chill the sauce and remove the solidified fat, then reheat.

Nutrition

Calories: 720kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 54g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 147mg | Sodium: 620mg | Potassium: 1893mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 21618IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 7mg

Whipped Feta with Marinated Olives and Toasted Pine Nuts

Dec 3, 2025 · 1 Comment

Creamy whipped feta topped with marinated olives and toasted pine nuts.

This creamy whipped feta dip is smooth and tangy, with just the right amount of sweet thanks to a touch of honey. It’s topped with bright lemony marinated olives, crunchy toasted pine nuts, and a sprinkle of Aleppo pepper. This is one of those quick back-pocket appetizers you’ll be making on repeat!

Whipped feta made with honey and yogurt and topped with marinated olives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This creamy whipped feta dip is about to become your new go-to appetizer! It comes together in minutes, yet tastes like something you’d find on a mezze platter at your favorite Mediterranean spot.

The base is a super smooth blend of feta cheese, Greek yogurt, lemon, olive oil, and just a touch of honey to balance the salty, savory flavors. Then it’s topped with bright, herb-marinated olives that add the perfect briny contrast. A handful of toasted pine nuts brings buttery crunch, and a pinch of Aleppo pepper adds a gentle warmth.

Serve it with anything you love to dip! Wedges of warm pita, crisp veggies, or baked pita chips. It’s also a fabulous addition to a larger mezze spread with your other favorite nibbles. Either way, whipped feta is always the first to disappear!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for whipped feta, including yogurt, honey, lemon and olives.
  • Feta Cheese: Look for a block of feta packed in brine. It whips up so much creamier than pre-crumbled feta, which tends to be drier.
  • Greek Yogurt: Greek yogurt gives the feta dip a delicious tang without thinning it out. Full-fat or low-fat both work, just avoid fat-free because it won’t be as creamy.
  • Lemon: Both lemon zest and lemon juice are in this recipe. Lemon zest adds a fragrant, bright citrus flavor without being as sharp as lemon juice. I love using a microplane for zesting.
  • Castelvetrano Olives: These are mild and buttery green olives and I like to call them a “gateway olive” if you’re unsure what olives to try first. Roughly chop or gently smash the pitted olives, so they’re rustic but still bite-sized.
  • Toasted Pine Nuts: Pine nuts toast quickly and bring a delicious buttery crunch. Toast them in a small skillet with just a splash of oil, watching closely. They can go from golden to burnt fast!
  • Aleppo Pepper: Aleppo pepper is milder and fruitier than traditional crushed red pepper flakes. It’s lovely sprinkled over the top, but you can omit it if you prefer no heat.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

This recipe is incredibly versatile. A few fun swaps:

  • Yogurt: Labneh is a Middle Eastern strained yogurt cheese and is an excellent substitute for Greek yogurt. It’s thicker, tangier, and extra creamy.
  • Citrus: Try replacing the lemon with orange zest + a splash of orange juice, or a combination of both. Both the feta and olives pair beautifully with orange.
  • Olives: A mix of Castelvetrano + Kalamata adds a deeper, brinier flavor. Use half-and-half and marinate the same way.
  • Nuts: Swap pine nuts for toasted sliced almonds, pistachios, or walnuts.

⏲️ Instructions

To a small food processor, add the feta cheese, yogurt, honey, olive oil and lemon zest and puree until the mixture is smooth.

Make the Whipped Feta: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, olive oil, lemon zest and honey to a food processor and blend until smooth, scraping down the sides as needed.

Add the roughly chopped olives to a bowl along with fresh herbs and olive oil, lemon zest and juice and toss to combine.

Make the Marinated Olives: Add the chopped olives to a bowl, along with olive oil, lemon zest and juice, chopped parsley and mint and toss to combine. Marinate for a few minutes before assembly.

How to Make Whipped Feta (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Use a food processor for the creamiest texture. It helps everything whip up super smooth. Use a rubber spatula to scrape down the sides of the processor as needed, so everything blends and is as smooth as possible.
  • Toast pine nuts carefully. Keep the heat on low to medium, moving them around frequently. Once they turn golden, remove the pine nuts from the heat, as they can continue to darken slightly as they cool.
  • Marinate the olives briefly. Even 10–20 minutes helps the flavors develop, but it’s not essential if you’re short on time.
  • Make-ahead: Both the whipped feta and marinated olives can be made 3 days in advance, but keep them separate until you’re ready to assemble.
  • Bring to room temperature: Bring both the whipped feta and olives to room temperature for 15-20 minutes before serving. This softens the dip and lets the flavors open up.
Creamy whipped feta cheese toped with marinated olives and toasted pine nuts.

Serving Suggestions

Whipped feta dip can go with just about anything! Here are some favorite ways to serve it:

  • Add it to a mezze spread or falafel platter with hummus, baba ghanoush, tzatziki, or baked pita chips.
  • On a Mediterranean charcuterie board with cheeses, marinated vegetables, nuts, and spreads.
  • With grilled meats such as chicken shawarma, kofta kebabs, or Mediterranean spiced lamb burgers, use it as a creamy feta sauce.
  • Serve with warm pita bread, pita chips, crackers, mini bell peppers, cucumber spears, cherry tomatoes, or your favorite raw vegetables.

More Dip Recipes to Try

  • Homemade tzatziki sauce with homemade pita chips.
    Homemade Tzatziki Sauce (with Pita Chips)
  • Loaded Hummus
  • Homemade caramelized onion dip recipe.
    Caramelized Onion Dip
  • Authentic baba ganoush recipe drizzled with olive oil and paprika.
    Lebanese Baba Ganoush

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Creamy whipped feta topped with marinated olives and toasted pine nuts.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Whipped Feta with Olives

This creamy whipped feta is topped with marinated olives, toasted pine nuts,and Aleppo pepper. An easy Mediterranean appetizer everyone loves.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Total Time15 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: creamy whipped feta, whipped feta dip, whipped feta with olives
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 384kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Chef Knife
  • Microplane

Ingredients

Whipped Feta

  • 8 oz feta roughly torn
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • Zest of ½ lemon
  • 2 teaspoons honey

Marinated Olive Topping

  • 1 cup Castelvetrano olives smashed and roughly chopped
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • Zest of ½ lemon
  • 2 teaspoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1-2 tablespoons chopped parsley
  • 1 –2 tablespoons chopped fresh mint
  • 2 –3 tablespoons toasted pine nuts
  • Aleppo pepper for garnish

For Serving

  • Cut bell pepper
  • Crackers
  • Baked Pita Chips
  • Pita Bread
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the Whipped Feta: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, olive oil, lemon zest and honey to a food processor and blend until smooth, scraping down the sides as needed.
  • Transfer to a shallow bowl and create swoops on the surface.
  • Make the Marinated Olives: Add the roughly chopped olives to a bowl, along with olive oil, lemon zest and juice, chopped parsley and mint.
  • Toss gently and let sit for a few minutes so the flavors combine.
  • Assemble: Spoon the marinated olive mixture over the whipped feta and top with toasted pine nuts and a pinch of Aleppo pepper.

Video

Notes

  • Use a food processor for the smoothest texture. Scrape down the sides as needed so everything blends evenly.
  • Toast pine nuts carefully. Keep the heat low and remove them once golden—they darken quickly.
  • Marinate the olives for 10–20 minutes if you can, but it’s optional.
  • Make ahead: Prep the whipped feta and olives up to 3 days ahead; store separately until serving.
  • Bring to room temperature: Let both sit out for 15–20 minutes so the dip softens and the olive oil loosens.

Nutrition

Calories: 384kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 19g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 1183mg | Potassium: 99mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 468IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 327mg | Iron: 1mg

Citrus Fennel Salad with Olives and Pistachios

Dec 2, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Citrus fennel salad with loads of fresh herbs, pistachios, olives and thin red onion.

Fresh and vibrant, this citrus fennel salad is layered with colors and textures. Sweet and tart citrus is combined with crunchy fennel, pistachios, and fresh herbs that pair beautifully with roasted meats, seafood, or on their own.

Citrus fennel salad with fresh mint, olives, chopped pistachios and dressed in a tangy vinaigrette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Bright, vibrant, and full of texture, this citrus fennel salad is a celebration of fresh citrus! A variety of citrus, with some sweeter ones like oranges and mandarins, and some tarter ones like grapefruit, is paired with thinly shaved fennel that’s crisp with just a hint of licorice. It’s a classic flavor combination that I also use in my Citrus & Fennel Roast Chicken, which is always a hit.

To add even more punch, buttery Castelvetrano olives, crunchy pistachios, fresh herbs, and tangy feta are layered in, creating a mix of flavors and textures that work beautifully together. Finished with a simple, bright vinaigrette, this salad is perfect alongside white wine steamed clams, roast chicken, grilled steak kabobs, or enjoyed on its own for a refreshing bite any time of year.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for citrus fennel salad with red onion, pistachios, fresh herbs and olives.
  • Citrus: Use a variety of citrus for different sweet and tart notes, including grapefruit, blood orange, navel oranges and mandarins.
  • Fennel: A unique, slightly licorice-flavored vegetable that adds crunch. I recommend using a mandolin to shave it thin (about ⅛–¼ inch) so it’s tender and easy to eat in a raw salad.
  • Red Onion: Thinly sliced for just a little sharpness, which balances the sweetness of the citrus.
  • Olives: Pitted Castelvetrano olives are buttery and mild, perfect in a salad. You can also find them in jars or at the olive bar in most grocery stores.
  • Mint: Fresh mint brightens the whole salad. If fresh isn’t available, you can use a small amount of dried mint.
  • Pistachios: Add a rich, crunchy texture that pairs beautifully with the citrus and fennel. Toast lightly if you want extra flavor.
  • Feta Cheese: Look for a block feta cheese in brine, which is much creamier than pre-crumbled feta.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Citrus: Use any combination of sweet and tart citrus, such as grapefruit, Navel or Cara Cara oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, or clementines. Winter is peak citrus season and really makes this salad shine.
  • Olives: Castelvetrano olives are buttery and mild, but you can use green olives for a tangy kick, or Kalamata olives for a bold flavor.
  • Cheese: Feta is classic, but creamy goat cheese or fried halloumi would also be delicious.
  • Nuts: Pistachios add a rich crunch, but toasted pine nuts or slivered almonds are excellent alternatives.
  • Herbs: Fresh mint is best, but if that’s unavailable, use about ½ teaspoon dried mint and adjust to taste.

⏲️ Instructions

Segment different varieties of citrus for the citrus fennel salad.

Prep the Citrus: Peel and slice the citrus into segments or rounds, making sure to remove any white pith. Transfer to a large bowl.

Garnish the citrus fennel salad with chopped pistachios and fresh mint before serving.

Assemble the Salad: Add shaved fennel and onions and scatter in the chopped mint, pistachios, and olives. Drizzle with vinaigrette and gently toss together.

How to Make Citrus Fennel Salad (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Shave the Fennel Thin: Aim for about ⅛ to ¼ inch slices so it’s tender and easy to eat alongside the delicate citrus. A mandolin works great for this!
  • Segment the Citrus: Use a sharp paring knife to trim the ends, peel off the skin and pith, and slice between the membranes to avoid any bitterness.
  • Make Ahead: You can prep the salad up to a day in advance, but wait to add the dressing and fresh herbs until serving.
  • Vinaigrette Prep: The dressing can be made up to 5 days ahead and stored in a jar in the refrigerator.
Citrus fennel salad with olives, chopped pistachios and fresh mint.

Serving Suggestions

This versatile salad pairs beautifully with:

  • Chicken Shawarma Skewers
  • Sausage-stuffed Cornish hens
  • Greek-style Lamb Shanks
  • Cedar-Plank Salmon or lemony Fish Piccata

It’s also wonderful on its own as a bright, refreshing side dish!

More Salad Recipes to Try

  • Grilled shrimp salad is fresh and hearty and full of spicy arugula, creamy avocado, thinly sliced fennel all dressed in a citrus vinaigrette.
    Grilled Shrimp Salad with Citrus and Fennel
  • Kale salad with roasted beets and citrus with orange segments off to the side.
    Winter Kale Salad with Radicchio and Roasted Beets
  • Easy lemon orzo salad is tossed with a simple lemon vinaigrette, grilled corn, creamy feta and lots of fresh basil.
    Lemon Orzo Salad with Corn and Basil
  • Roasted sweet potato salad with salad mix, creamy goat cheese, citrus and candied pecans.
    Roasted Sweet Potato Salad

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Citrus fennel salad with loads of fresh herbs, pistachios, olives and thin red onion.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Citrus Fennel Salad with Mint & Pistachios

This citrus fennel salad is all about brightness and texture, with sweet-tart citrus, shaved fennel and lots of fresh herbs and crunchy pistachios.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Total Time15 minutes mins
Course: Salad, Side Dish
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: citrus fennel salad, citrus salad with pistachios, mediterranean citrus salad, shrimp and citrus salad
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 435kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Chef Knife
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Mandolin

Ingredients

For the salad:

  • 1 grapefruit peeled and cut into segments
  • 1 blood orange peeled and cut into segments
  • 1 navel orange peeled and cut into segments
  • 2 mandarins peeled and sliced or separated into segments
  • 1 small fennel bulb thinly shaved (plus fronds for garnish if you like)
  • ¼ small red onion very thinly sliced
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh mint leaves plus extra for garnish
  • ¼ cup chopped pistachios
  • ½ cup pitted Castelvetrano olives roughly chopped
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta

For the vinaigrette:

  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 2-3 tablespoons white wine vinegar
  • 2 –3 tablespoons fresh citrus juice squeeze from leftover membranes and peels
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • Pinch of salt and black pepper
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Prepare the citrus: Peel and slice the citrus into segments or rounds, making sure to remove any white pith. Lay everything on a platter or transfer to a large bowl.
  • Make the vinaigrette: In a small bowl or jar, combine the olive oil, white wine vinegar, citrus juice, honey, salt, pepper, and Dijon. Whisk, or if using a mason jar, seal tightly and shake vigorously until the dressing is fully emulsified.
  • Toss the fennel + onion: In a mixing bowl, toss the shaved fennel and red onion with 1–2 tablespoons of the vinaigrette just to start softening and “quick-pickling” them.
  • Assemble the salad: Add the fennel mixture to the citrus. Scatter in the chopped mint, pistachios, and olives. Drizzle with more vinaigrette and gently toss or arrange.
  • Finish: Garnish with extra mint, pistachios, fennel fronds, and feta if using. Serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Shave the Fennel Thin: Aim for about ⅛ to ¼ inch slices so it’s tender and easy to eat alongside the delicate citrus. A mandolin works great for this!
  • Segment the Citrus: Use a sharp paring knife to trim the ends, peel off the skin and pith, and slice between the membranes to avoid any bitterness.
  • Make Ahead: You can prep the salad up to a day in advance, but wait to add the dressing and fresh herbs until serving.
  • Vinaigrette Prep: The dressing can be made up to 5 days ahead and stored in a jar in the refrigerator. 

Nutrition

Calories: 435kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 24g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 418mg | Potassium: 604mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 1455IU | Vitamin C: 69mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 1mg

Jewish-Style Sweet and Sour Meatballs

Nov 25, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Jewish style sweet and sour meatballs in a sweet and tangy tomato sauce.

Jewish-style sweet-and-sour meatballs are a classic comfort recipe, with tender beef meatballs simmered in a tangy and slightly sweet tomato sauce. It's an easy, flavorful recipe that's made with just a handful of pantry staples.

These Jewish style sweet and sour meatballs are a classic Jewish recipe with beef meatballs simmered in a tangy and slightly sweet tomato sauce.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Jewish-style sweet-and-sour meatballs are a staple in Jewish home cooking and you’ll find them showing up for weeknight dinners, Shabbat meals, and holidays like Hanukkah or Passover. Inspired by my mom’s sweet-and-sour brisket, this version swaps the brisket for tender beef meatballs that simmer in a tangy and slightly sweet tomato sauce made from simple, pantry-friendly ingredients.

Families all have their own nostalgic variations, but this version sticks to that old-school tradition with tomato sauce, brown sugar, and fresh lemon juice, giving it that perfect sweet-and-tangy balance that makes these meatballs so comforting and distinct.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for Jewish style sweet and sour meatballs including crushed tomatoes, ground beef, brown sugar, red wine and spices.
  • Ground Beef: Use 80/20 ground beef, meaning that there is 20% fat to 80% of the beef. The fat content will keep the meatballs tender and flavorful.
  • Spices (garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, parsley): Simple, straightforward seasonings that give the meatballs a flavorful but familiar profile.
  • Panko Breadcrumbs: Helps bind the meatballs while keeping the texture light.
  • Tomato Sauce: Canned tomato sauce keeps things easy, but you can also use crushed tomatoes, strained tomatoes, or even roasted and blended fresh tomatoes.
  • Brown Sugar: Adds sweetness with a deeper, slightly caramel flavor compared to white sugar.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice is what gives that signature sour pucker in the tomato sauce. Or add a bit of citric acid, as my mom used. It brightens the sauce and brings out the sweet-and-sour contrast.
  • Red Wine: Use a medium-bodied wine, such as a Cabernet or red blend. The wine will add a lovely layer of flavor to the sauce without being overpowering.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Different Ground Meats: Ground veal or ground chicken both work well. Ground turkey is leaner and will taste a bit different, so I don’t recommend it for this recipe.
  • Tomato Options: You can use tomato sauce, crushed tomatoes, strained tomatoes, or roasted tomatoes blended smooth.
  • Without wine: Simply skip it. The sauce will still be delicious. Or, you can also add a tiny splash of balsamic vinegar for deeper tang.
  • For Passover: Substitute the panko breadcrumbs with matzo meal.

⏲️ Instructions

Once the chopped onions are sautéed, add red wine and let the wine reduce.

Sauté the onions: Cook the onions until soft, then add red wine and let it reduce until the pan is nearly dry.

Simmer the sweet and sour tomato sauce for a few minutes before the meatballs are added.

Make the sweet-and-sour sauce: Stir in the tomato sauce, sugar, and lemon juice, then let the sauce gently simmer for a few minutes.

Add the beef meatballs to the sweet and sour tomato sauce and simmer until the meatballs are just cooked through.

Add the meatballs: Nestle the uncooked beef meatballs into the simmering sauce in a single layer.

Simmer the meatballs in the tomato sauce until the sauce has reduced slightly and the meatballs are just cooked through and tender.

Simmer until tender: Cover and cook until the meatballs are cooked through and the sauce has thickened slightly, about 25-30 minutes.

How to Make Sweet and Sour Meatballs (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Do not overmix the meatballs: Mix until the ingredients are just combined. Overworking the mixture can make the meatballs tough.
  • Taste the sauce before adding the meatballs: Adjust the sweetness (add more brown sugar) or tanginess (add more lemon juice) based on personal preference.
  • Freeze Ahead: Roll the meatballs and freeze uncooked, then they can be simmered straight from frozen.
  • Make in Advance: Cook the full recipe ahead of time, then reheat gently on the stove. If the sauce thickens, add up to ½ cup water to loosen it.
These Jewish style sweet and sour meatballs have tender beef meatballs simmered in a tangy and slightly sweet tomato sauce.

Serving Suggestions

  • Serve over white rice. It’s classic and soaks up the sweet-and-tangy sauce beautifully.
  • Pair with potato latkes for a Hanukkah dinner.
  • Add a starter like matzo ball soup for a full holiday menu.

More Ground Beef Recipes To Try

  • Roasted acorn squash stuffed with spiced rice and ground beef.
    Stuffed Acorn Squash with Ground Beef and Spiced Rice (Hashweh)
  • Turkish stuffed onions stuffed with a flavorful meat and rice mixture and cooked in a robust tomato sauce.
    Turkish Stuffed Onions
  • Persian Meatballs in Turmeric Broth (Koofteh)
  • Turkish Kofta Kebab (Grilled Beef and Lamb Skewers)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Jewish style sweet and sour meatballs in a sweet and tangy tomato sauce.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Jewish-Style Sweet and Sour Meatballs

Jewish-style sweet-and-sour meatballs are simmered in a sweet, tangy tomato sauce for a flavorful and comforting weeknight dinner.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Jewish
Keyword: jewish meatballs, jewish style sweet and sour meatballs, sweet and sour meatballs
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 565kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls
  • Dutch Oven Braiser

Ingredients

For the Meatballs

  • 1 pound ground beef 80/20 (80% beef, 20%fat)
  • 1 large egg
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs add more if the mixture feels too wet
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper to taste

For the Sauce

  • 1 small onion finely chopped
  • 1 to 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 32 ounce tomato sauce
  • ½-1 cup water use the tomato can to rinse
  • ½ cup brown sugar add more to taste
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice or apple cider vinegar about 1 juicy lemon
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • Kosher salt and black pepper to taste
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the meatballs: In a large bowl, combine the ground beef, egg, panko, garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Mix gently until just combined, do not overwork the meat.
  • Form into one-inch meatballs (about twelve) and set aside on a plate.
  • Start the sauce: Heat olive oil in a large braiser or deep sauté pan over medium heat. Add the chopped onion and cook until softened and lightly golden, about 3-4 minutes.
  • Deglaze with wine: Pour the wine in and let the wine reduce for about a minute.
  • Add the tomato sauce, water, brown sugar, lemon juice, paprika, salt, and pepper. Stir and bring to a gentle simmer for 3-5 minutes. Taste and adjust sweetness or tanginess.
  • Add the meatballs: Nestle the meatballs into the sauce in a single layer. Spoon some sauce over the top.
  • Simmer: Cover, leaving a small opening and simmer gently for 25-30 minutes, until the meatballs are cooked through and the sauce has thickened slightly.
  • Serve: Taste one more time for seasoning. Serve hot over rice and spoon extra sauce on top.

Video

Notes

  • Do not overmix the meatballs: Mix until the ingredients are just combined. Overworking the mixture can make the meatballs tough.
  • Taste the sauce before adding the meatballs.: Adjust the sweetness (add more brown sugar) or tanginess (add more lemon juice) based on personal preference.
  • Freeze Ahead: Roll the meatballs and freeze uncooked, then hey can be simmered straight from frozen.
  • Make in Advance: Cook the full recipe ahead of time, then reheat gently on the stove. If the sauce thickens, add up to ½ cup water to loosen it.
  • Yields about 12 meatballs.

Nutrition

Calories: 565kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 1234mg | Potassium: 1151mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 37g | Vitamin A: 1289IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 107mg | Iron: 5mg

Roasted Acorn Squash with Goat Cheese and Arugula

Nov 21, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Roasted acorn squash with goat cheese and arugula salad.

Inspired by an Argentine-style squash salad, roasted acorn squash is filled with creamy goat cheese, peppery arugula, and a bright parsley chimichurri vinaigrette. The warmth of the squash gently melts the cheese and wilts the arugula, and every bite is savory, tangy and creamy.

Roasted acorn squash halves with goat cheese, arugula and herb vinaigrette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This roasted squash recipe is inspired by Argentine-style calabaza salad, which is a warm roasted squash that gets filled with greens, cheese, and dressed with a bright chimichurri-like vinaigrette. There’s no strict traditional name, but this style is very classic in Argentine home cooking-roasted squash + fresh herbs + tangy red wine vinegar.

Once the roasted acorn squash comes out of the oven, use it as your “bowl” and crumble creamy goat cheese right in the center, along with peppery arugula, and finish with a good drizzle of the bright parsley chimichurri all over.

As you scoop into the tender squash, the heat gently melts the cheese and wilts the arugula, so every bite is warm, tangy, nutty, and incredibly satisfying.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for roasted squash with arugula and parsley chimichurri, including goat cheese and red wine vinegar.

This recipe uses minimal ingredients, so look for the best quality and freshest available for the best flavor.

  • Acorn Squash: A classic fall squash with a naturally sweet, nutty flavor. Look for one that feels heavy for its size and has firm, dull skin.
  • Goat Cheese: Look for a log of goat cheese instead of the pre-crumbled option, which is creamier and will melt beautifully into the warm squash.
  • Arugula: Adds that peppery bite and wilts just slightly from the heat of the squash.
  • Fresh Parsley + Oregano: Both are classic Argentine chimichurri herbs. Parsley keeps things bright; oregano adds an earthy punch.
  • Olive Oil: Look for an Argentine extra-virgin olive oil, which tends to be bold and peppery.
  • Red Wine Vinegar: A very traditional acid in chimichurri that is bright and punchy.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Squash Options: Any hearty winter squash works great. Try kabocha squash, butternut squash, delicata, or even a small sugar pumpkin. If the squash is large, cut it into quarters.
  • Herbs: For a twist, add a handful of mint for brightness. Cilantro isn’t classic in Argentina, but will add a lovely bright layer of flavor.
  • Cheese: Goat cheese is the most natural pairing here, but a creamy feta cheese would be great for a saltier bite. Or roughly torn Burrata for extra creaminess.

⏲️ Instructions

Cut the acorn squash in half, scoop out the seeds and season with olive oil, salt and pepper.

Season the Squash: Brush the acorn squash with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.

Roast the acorn squash halves until tender.

Roast Until Tender: Roast the squash at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for about 45 minutes, until the flesh is soft and caramelized around the edges.

Add the parsley, oregano, olive oil and red wine vinegar to a food processor and blend to make a vinaigrette.

3. Make the Herby Vinaigrette: Blend parsley, oregano, olive oil, and red wine vinegar until bright and smooth.

Garnish the roasted squash halves with goat cheese, arugula and drizzle with chimichurri.

Assemble: While the squash is still warm, fill with goat cheese, arugula and drizzle with the vinaigrette.

How to Make Roasted Acorn Squash (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Use a sharp knife for cutting squash: Winter squash is tough to cut through. Use a sharp knife on a stable cutting board when cutting the squash.
  • Roast until fully tender: Hard squash takes a while to become tender. To check for doneness, use a paring knife to pierce through the squash and if it slides in easily, it’s ready.
  • Trim the bottom: When prepping the squash, cut off a bit of the root ends, so the squash sits flat on the plate.
  • Assemble while warm: Add the goat cheese and arugula while the squash is still hot so the cheese gently melts and the greens slightly wilt.
  • Make the vinaigrette ahead: The chimichurri keeps well for at least 3 days. It’s amazing on roasted vegetables, grilled meats, or another salad.
Roasted acorn squash stuffed with arugula and goat cheese.

Serving Suggestions

This warm squash salad is hearty enough for a full lunch or light dinner, but it also makes a beautiful seasonal side dish.

Here are a few perfect pairings:

  • Grilled Steak: A classic Argentine pairing! Serve alongside Tomahawk steak or grilled steak kabobs. The tangy vinaigrette cuts through the richness.
  • Tuna Empanadas: Another classic Argentine recipe that would pair nicely with the bright and tanginess from the roasted squash salad.  
  • Roasted Fish: Serve alongside herb crusted salmon or garlic shrimp. The acidity would pair nicely together.
  • Fall holiday Menus: This fits right onto a Thanksgiving dinner, alongside stuffed Cornish hens and sautéed balsamic Brussels sprouts.

More Squash Recipes to Try

  • Parmesan Roasted Delicata Squash with Sage
    Parmesan Roasted Delicata Squash with Sage
  • Roasted acorn squash stuffed with spiced rice and ground beef.
    Stuffed Acorn Squash with Ground Beef and Spiced Rice (Hashweh)
  • Acorn squash is drizzled with tahini and topped with chopped parsley and pomegranate seeds.
    Maple Roasted Acorn Squash with Pomegranate and Tahini
  • Butternut squash risotto with fried sage and Parmesan cheese.
    Butternut Squash Risotto with Crispy Sage

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Roasted acorn squash with goat cheese and arugula salad.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Roasted Acorn Squash with Goat Cheese, Arugula & Herby Vinaigrette

Inspired by an Argentine-style salad, roasted acorn squash is filled with goat cheese, arugula and a bright chimichurri vinaigrette.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time55 minutes mins
Course: Main, Side Dish
Cuisine: Argentinian, South American
Keyword: roasted acorn squash with goat cheese, simple roasted acorn squash
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 248kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Food Processor

Ingredients

For the Squash

  • 2 acorn squash halved and seeds removed
  • Olive oil
  • Salt and black pepper
  • 2 ounces Crumbled goat cheese
  • ½ cup fresh baby Arugula

For the Herby Vinaigrette

  • 1 small bunch fresh parsley leaves about ½ cup
  • 2-3 sprigs fresh oregano leaves removed
  • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil Argentine if you have it
  • Salt and black pepper to taste
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (200°C).
  • Drizzle the cut sides of the squash with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Place cut-side down on a lined baking sheet and roast for 35–45 minutes, or until the flesh is tender and caramelized around the edges.
  • Make the Vinaigrette: In a blender or small food processor, combine the parsley, oregano, red wine vinegar, and olive oil. Blend until smooth and bright green. Season to taste with salt and pepper.
  • Assemble: Once the roasted squash is tender and still hot, remove from the oven and flip each half over. Divide crumbled goat cheese among the squash cavities and top with a generous handful of arugula.
  • Finish: Drizzle the herby vinaigrette over the arugula and goat cheese. As you toss everything together, the warm squash will gently soften the cheese and wilt the greens.

Video

Notes

  • Use a sharp knife: Winter squash is tough, so use a sharp knife on a stable cutting board.
  • Roast until tender: Pierce with a paring knife — if it slides in easily, the squash is ready.
  • Trim the bottom: Slice a bit off the root end so the squash sits flat on the plate.
  • Assemble while warm: Add goat cheese and arugula while the squash is hot so everything softens and melts.
  • Make ahead: The herb vinaigrette keeps for up to 3 days and is great on veggies, grilled meats, or salads.

Nutrition

Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 61mg | Potassium: 774mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 1026IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 2mg

Stuffed Turkey Breast with Sausage Stuffing

Nov 14, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Roasted stuffed turkey breast filled with cranberry sausage stuffing and seasoned with

This stuffed turkey breast is rolled with a savory sausage stuffing and slathered with an herbaceous compound butter and roasted until the skin is beautifully crisp and golden. It’s a flavorful and elegant twist on a classic holiday centerpiece.

Rolled turkey breast stuffed with sausage and cranberry stuffing and roasted until golden brown.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This stuffed turkey breast is a fantastic option if you’re hosting a smaller Thanksgiving or simply don’t want to roast an entire bird. The turkey is butterflied and pounded thin, then rolled with a savory sausage stuffing so everything stays incredibly tender, moist, and full of flavor.

The stuffing adds richness and texture, while the herb–garlic compound butter melts into the meat and crisps the skin beautifully. I use a boneless, skin-on turkey breast, which is easy to find this time of year, and roasting it over onions and celery with a splash of white wine keeps everything juicy.

This would be a fantastic main dish served alongside lemon roasted brussels sprouts and garlic mashed potatoes!

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Chicken instead of turkey: A large boneless, skin-on chicken breast works beautifully and cooks faster. Start checking around 50–60 minutes.
  • Stuffing options: Use any of your stuffing recipes, such as challah and sausage stuffing or a savory bread pudding, or doctor up store-bought with sautéed mushrooms, cranberries, chestnuts, or extra herbs.
  • Dairy-free option: Swap the butter for a vegan butter or make an herb-packed olive oil paste instead.
  • Extra add-ins: Chopped roasted chestnuts, caramelized onions, or cooked wild rice make great additions to the stuffing.

⏲️ Instructions

Spread the stuffing onto the inside of the pounded turkey breast, gently pressing the stuffing into the meat.

Butterfly, Pound & Add Stuffing: Spread the turkey breast open, pound it to an even thickness, and press the stuffing firmly across the surface.

Roll up the turkey breast, tie with string and slather with compound butter. Then place in toasting pan with vegetables.

Roll & Butter the Turkey: Roll the stuffed turkey breast tightly, tie with twine, slather with the compound butter, and place it over the onions and celery.

Roast the stuffed turkey breast until the skin is deeply golden brown and turkey is cooked through.

Roast Until Golden: Roast at 425°F until the turkey is deeply golden, the skin is crisp, and it reaches an internal temp of about 160–165°F.

Once done, let the rolled turkey breast rest for a few minuets before slicing.

Slice & Serve: Let the turkey rest, remove the twine, and slice into thick rounds to reveal the stuffing inside.

How to Make Stuffed Turkey Bread (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Make sure the turkey is fully thawed: It makes butterflying and pounding so much easier.
  • Butterfly + pound evenly: Place the turkey skin-side down, make a few careful slits in the thickest areas, cover with plastic wrap, and pound to an even thickness.
  • Press the stuffing firmly so it adheres to the meat and rolls tightly.
  • Use kitchen twine: It keeps everything secure as it roasts.
  • Rub the compound butter under the skin once the turkey is rolled, being careful not to pierce the skin.
  • Roast uncovered first: If the skin browns too quickly, tent loosely with foil.
  • For extra-crisp skin: Broil for 3–5 minutes at the end (keep a close eye!).
  • Always rest the turkey at least 5–10 minutes before slicing. Don’t forget to cut off the twine before serving.
Roasted and stuffed turkey breast with stuffing and a flavorful compound butter.

Serving Suggestions

Serve the stuffed turkey breast as a main for a. smaller Thanksgiving or any fall gathering. Pair it with:

  • Potato Leek Gratin
  • Sautéed Green Beans with Pine Nuts
  • Shredded Brussels Sprouts Salad with Parmesan
  • Pomegranate Cranberry Sauce

Wine pairing: A crisp Chardonnay or Pinot Blanc works beautifully with the buttery herbs and roasted turkey.

More Turkey Recipes to Try

  • Thanksgiving meatballs in a creamy gravy.
    Thanksgiving Turkey Meatballs
  • Herb Roasted Turkey Thighs with Fennel
  • Roast Turkey with Citrus, Herbs and Za'atar
  • Thanksgiving Dinner for Two

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Roasted stuffed turkey breast filled with cranberry sausage stuffing and seasoned with
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Stuffed Turkey Breast with Sausage Stuffing

Juicy stuffed turkey breast filled with sausage and cranberry stuffing and roasted with garlic herb butter until perfectly golden and tender.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Resting10 minutes mins
Total Time2 hours hrs
Course: Main, Main Course
Cuisine: American
Keyword: rolled turkey breast, stuffed turkey breast, stuffed turkey breast with stuffing
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 652kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

Turkey and Stuffing

  • 2 split boneless skin-on turkey breasts (about 5-6 pounds total)
  • 2 cups cooked stuffing
  • ½ pound cooked Italian sausage
  • ½ cup dried cranberries

Compound Butter

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter softened
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic grated or finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh sage leaves finely chopped, about 6-8 leaves
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme leaves chopped
  • 2 teaspoons Kosher salt
  • Ground black pepper

Roasting Pan:

  • 1 onion quartered
  • 2 stalks celery cut into big chunks
  • ½ cup dry white wine
  • Salt + pepper
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Prepare the turkey: Place the turkey breast skin-side down on a cutting board. Butterfly the thickest areas with a few careful slits, then cover with plastic wrap and pound with a meat mallet to an even thickness.
  • Mix the stuffing: In a bowl, combine the cooked stuffing, cooked sausage, and dried cranberries.
  • Stuff and roll: Spread the stuffing evenly over the turkey breast, gently pressing down so the stuffing adheres to the meat. Roll tightly from the long end and tie with kitchen twine in 3–4 places.
  • Make and apply the compound butter: Mix softened butter, olive oil, garlic, rosemary, sage, thyme, salt, and pepper. Rub the mixture all over the outside of the rolled turkey, tucking a little under the skin if possible.
  • Assemble the roasting pan: Arrange the onions and celery in a roasting pan. Place the turkey on top. Season with salt and pepper and pour the white wine around the pan.
  • Roast: Preheat oven to 425°F.
  • Roast the turkey for 1 hour 20–30 minutes, checking after the first hour. If the skin browns too quickly, tent with foil.
  • For extra crisp skin, broil for the last 3–5 minutes.
  • Rest and slice: Let the turkey rest 5–10 minutes. Remove the twine, then slice into thick rounds and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Make sure the turkey is fully thawed: It makes butterflying and pounding so much easier.
  • Butterfly + pound evenly: Place the turkey skin-side down, make a few careful slits in the thickest areas, cover with plastic wrap, and pound to an even thickness.
  • Press the stuffing firmly so it adheres to the meat and rolls tightly.
  • Use kitchen twine: It keeps everything secure as it roasts.
  • Rub the compound butter under the skin once the turkey is rolled, being careful not to pierce the skin.
  • Roast uncovered first: If the skin browns too quickly, tent loosely with foil.
  • For extra-crisp skin: Broil for 3–5 minutes at the end (keep a close eye!).
  • Always rest the turkey at least 5–10 minutes before slicing. Don’t forget to cut off the twine before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 652kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 53g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 177mg | Sodium: 1159mg | Potassium: 756mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 4mg

Everything Bagel Stuffing

Nov 11, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Everything spiced bagel stuffing is perfect for Thanksgiving.

All the flavors of an everything bagel, baked into a savory, herby Thanksgiving stuffing! Torn everything-spiced bagel cubes are mixed with classic aromatics for a fun twist on the traditional side dish!

Everything bagel stuffing with sage.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

If you love everything bagels, this stuffing is going to be your new favorite Thanksgiving side. It has all the savory, herby aromatics of a traditional stuffing, with celery, onion, and fresh herbs. But instead of plain bread cubes, it starts with torn pieces of everything bagels for extra flavor and a chewy, toasty texture.

This bagel stuffing is vegetarian, easy to make ahead, and can even be made kosher-friendly by swapping the butter for olive oil or dairy-free butter. It’s perfect for Thanksgiving dinner or even brunch the next morning with a fried egg on top (speaking from experience).

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for everything spiced bagel stuffing with everything bagels, butter, savory herbs, celery and garlic.
  • Everything bagels: About 4–5 large bagels, ideally a day old. Tear or cube them into 1–1½-inch pieces for the best texture.
  • Everything bagel seasoning: Use about ¼ cup store-bought or homemade.
  • Aromatics: Onion, celery and garlic are classic stuffing aromatics.
  • Fresh herbs: Sage, thyme, and rosemary bring classic Thanksgiving flavors.
  • Eggs & vegetable broth: Bind the stuffing together and keep it perfectly moist.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Bagels: Use savory ones like sesame, poppyseed, or pumpernickel. Avoid sweet bagels.
  • Add-ins: Sautéed mushrooms, roasted chestnuts, or cooked sausage (turkey, chicken, pork, or even vegetarian sausage) would all be great additions.
  • Kosher-friendly: Skip the butter and use olive oil or dairy-free butter.
  • Brunch twist: Bake and top with a runny fried egg for a delicious savory breakfast option.

⏲️ Instructions

Season the torn bagel cubes with everything bagel spice and toast to dry the bread out.

Toast the Bagel Cubes: Spread torn bagel cubes on a baking sheet, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with everything bagel seasoning and toss to coat. Toast for 8-10 minutes.

Saute the chopped onion, chopped celery and herbs in olive oil.

Sauté the Aromatics: In a large skillet, melt butter and olive oil. Add onion and celery and cook for about 10–12 minutes. Stir in garlic and chopped herbs and cook for another minute.

Mix the sauteed vegetables and herbs with the toasted everything bagel cubes.

Mix Everything Together: In a large bowl, combine the toasted bagel cubes, sautéed vegetables and pour in vegetable broth mixture and toss to evenly coat.

Bake the everything spiced bagel stuffing until lightly golden on top.

Bake Until Golden: Transfer the stuffing to a buttered baking dish and dot with butter. Bake at 400°F for about 40 minutes, uncovered, until the top is golden.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the Bagels: Toast them first so they can soak up the liquid without getting too mushy.
  • Sauté Slowly: Cook the celery and onion for about 10–12 minutes so they soften and get sweet, then add garlic and herbs at the end.
  • Mix Well: Toss everything well so every piece of bagel is coated with the egg and broth mixture.
  • Bake uncovered: Bake at 400°F for about 40 minutes until the top is golden and crisp.
  • Make ahead: Assemble up to 2 days in advance, refrigerate, then bake before serving. Add a splash more broth if it looks dry.
Everything spiced bagel stuffing with fresh herbs.

Serving Suggestions

Serve this Everything Bagel Stuffing as part of your Thanksgiving spread alongside:

  • Citrus Roast Turkey
  • Pomegranate Cranberry Sauce
  • Green Beans with Pine Nuts
  • Garlic Mashed Potatoes

Or keep it simple and serve it for brunch with a fried egg on top!

More Thanksgiving Recipe Inspiration

  • Cooked challah stuffing with sausage and leeks.
    Challah Stuffing with Leeks and Sausage
  • re whisked together with sweet maple syrup and tangy pomegranate molasses and lathered on top of rainbow carrots and sweet anjou pears. Once caramelized, the roasted carrots and pears are finished with pomegranate seeds and Aleppo pepper.
    Roasted Carrots with Pomegranate and Pears
  • Sauteed balsamic brussels sprouts topped with balsamic, toasted pine nuts and dried cranberries.
    Sautéed Balsamic Brussels Sprouts with Pine Nuts
  • Roasted sweet potato salad with salad mix, creamy goat cheese, citrus and candied pecans.
    Roasted Sweet Potato Salad

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Everything spiced bagel stuffing is perfect for Thanksgiving.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Everything Bagel Stuffing

Everything Bagel Stuffing combines torn everything bagels, herbs, and aromatics for a savory, make-ahead Thanksgiving side that everyone will love.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time55 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American, Jewish
Keyword: bagel stuffing, everything bagel stuffing
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 351kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls
  • skillet
  • Silicone Spoon Spatula

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large everything bagels cut or torn into 1–1½-inch cubes
  • ¼ cup everything bagel seasoning
  • 3 tablespoons butter divided
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided
  • 2 celery stalks diced
  • 1 small yellow onion diced
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh sage
  • 2 cups vegetable broth
  • 2 large eggs whisked
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Chives finely chopped, for garnish (optional)

Everything Bagel Seasoning

  • 1 tablespoon poppy seeds
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 1 tablespoon dried minced garlic
  • 1 tablespoon dried minced onion
  • 1 ½ teaspoons flaky sea salt or coarse kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Spread bagel cubes on a baking sheet, drizzle with 1 tablespoon of olive oil, and toss with the everything bagel seasoning. Toast for 8–10 minutes, until slightly crisp and dry.
  • In a large skillet, heat 2 tablespoons of butter and the remaining 1 tablespoon of olive oil over medium heat. Add celery and onion and sauté for 10–12 minutes, until softened. Add garlic, rosemary, thyme, and sage, and cook for another minute.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together eggs and vegetable broth. Add toasted bagel cubes, any seasoning that may have fallen off, and the sautéed veggies. Toss until evenly coated.
  • Transfer to a buttered casserole dish and dot the remaining tablespoon of butter on top. Bake uncovered for about 40 minutes, until golden and crisp on top and tender inside.
  • Once done, garnish with chopped chives, if using. Let cool slightly before serving.

Everything Bagel Seasoning

  • If making your own seasoning blend, combine all of the ingredients in a small bowl and mix well.
  • You'll need ¼ cup for this recipe. Store in an airtight jar at room temperature for up to 6 months.

Notes

  • Dry the Bagels: Toast them first so they can soak up the liquid without getting too mushy.
  • Bake uncovered: Bake at 400°F for about 40 minutes until the top is golden and crisp.
  • Make ahead: Assemble up to 2 days in advance, refrigerate, then bake before serving. Add a splash more broth if it looks dry.
  • Make Your Own Everything Seasoning:
    • 1 tablespoon each of poppy seeds, sesame seeds, dried minced garlic, dried minced onion and 1 ½ teaspoon flaky sea salt (or coarse kosher salt).

Nutrition

Calories: 351kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 1949mg | Potassium: 241mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 277IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg
Everything Spiced Challah and Mushroom Stuffing

French Dinner Party Menu

Oct 19, 2025 · 2 Comments

Julia Child's French beef bourguignon with red wine, mushrooms and herbs.

There’s something so timeless about a French dinner party. Good wine flowing, comforting dishes that fill the kitchen with incredible smells, and everyone lingering around the table long after dinner’s done. This menu keeps it classic but approachable, with bold flavors and mostly make-ahead recipes so you can enjoy the evening, too!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧀 Appetizers

Option 1: Boursin-Stuffed Mushrooms
These bite-sized mushrooms are creamy, garlicky, and always a hit! Plus, they can be prepped ahead and baked right before serving.

Boursin stuffed mushrooms garnished with chopped parsley and served with white wine.

Option 2: Simple Cheese Board
A small selection of French cheeses like brie, comté, and chèvre, served with grapes, sliced baguette, and a drizzle of honey.

💡 Tip: Let the cheese sit out for at least an hour before serving. Cheese should come to room temperature so it can “breathe” and reveal its full flavor.

Small cheese board with brie, olives and cured meats.

🥣 Soup (Optional Starter)

Creamy Potato Leek Soup Classic and comforting and only made with a few ingredients. Serve the soup in small bowls or mugs before the main course.

Easy potato leek soup that is incredibly creamy and garnished with fresh thyme and olive oil.

🍲 Main Course Options

Beef Bourguignon A rich, wine-braised beef stew that’s even better the next day, so feel free to make it ahead. Serve straight from a Dutch oven at the center of your table for an effortless, family-style presentation.

Julia Child's beef bourguignon with mushrooms, onions and carrots in a decadent wine sauce.

Lobster Thermidor
If you're looking for a seafood option, this is luxurious yet surprisingly manageable. You can make the creamy sauce ahead, then gently reheat with the lobster right before serving.

Inspired by Julia Child's Lobster thermidor recipe, this version has mushrooms, Cognac and Gruyere cheese.

🍽 Side Dishes

  • Simple Green Salad with Dijon Vinaigrette- A crisp contrast to all the rich dishes.
  • Crusty Baguette or French Bread- For mopping up every last drop of sauce.

🍐 Dessert

White Wine Poached Pears Elegant, light, and make-ahead friendly (plus they pair beautifully with dessert wine).

Or keep it simple: a few squares of dark chocolate paired with espresso or a small glass of dessert wine.

White wine poached pears served whole with reduced wine sauce.

🍷 Wine Pairings

  • You can’t go wrong with a good French red like a Burgundy or Pinot Noir, both pair beautifully with Beef Bourguignon.
  • If you’re serving seafood, go for a White Burgundy or Chardonnay. For dessert, a small pour of Sauternes or sparkling rosé is always lovely.

🗓️ Make-Ahead Tips

  • Beef Bourguignon: Even better made a day ahead.
  • Lobster Thermidor: Make the sauce in advance; assemble with lobster and reheat gently before serving.
  • Potato Leek Soup: Can be made 1–2 days ahead and reheated.
  • Poached Pears: Poached pears are even better the next day. Refrigerate them right in the syrup and serve chilled or at room temperature.
  • Cheeseboard: Assemble day of and let the cheese sit out for 1 hour.

🎶 Set the Mood

No French dinner party is complete without music. Here's a few playlist suggestions to keep the vibe warm and relaxed.

  • French Café Jazz: Think Édith Piaf, Charles Trenet, and modern covers of French classics.
  • Bossa Nova Evenings: Smooth and upbeat. Stan Getz, Astrud Gilberto, and João Gilberto add the perfect background rhythm.
  • Parisian Nights on Spotify or Apple Music: Search “French Dinner Party” or “Paris Café” for curated mixes that feel effortlessly chic.

Lambrusco Spritz

Oct 15, 2025 · Leave a Comment

This delicious lambrusco spritz cocktail is served with a salt and sugar rim and garnished with olives, olive oil and an orange slice.

This Lambrusco Spritz is bold and citrusy, with the perfect balance of bitter and bubbly. The sweet-salted orange rim, briny olives, and drizzle of olive oil add layers of punchy, savory flavor that’s deliciously unexpected.

Lambrusco spritz is garnished with olives, olive oil and an orange slice.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

If you love a good spritz but want something a bit more complex than your usual summer aperitif, this Lambrusco Spritz is it!

Sparkling red Lambrusco brings a fruity richness that balances beautifully with the citrus and bitters from Campari. A salted orange-sugar rim and a drizzle of olive oil take it over the top, adding a savory, aromatic finish. It’s the perfect cocktail to kick off a fall dinner party or even Thanksgiving.

📋 Ingredients

  • Lambrusco: A lightly sparkling red wine from Italy that’s fruity and slightly dry. Look for one labeled secco (dry) for the best balance.
  • Campari: A bright red Italian aperitif with notes of orange and herbs. It’s bitter-sweet and a great option if you're looking for a less sweet liqueur.
  • Fresh Orange Juice: It adds a hint of natural sweetness and compliments the Campari very well. For a more bitter flavor, substitute with grapefruit juice.
  • Sparkling Water: Just a splash to top it off.
  • Salt–Sugar Rim: A mix of Kosher salt, sugar, and finely grated orange zest rubbed together until fragrant.
  • Garnish: Good-quality extra-virgin olive oil (for drizzling), green olives on a skewer, and an orange slice.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Chill your glass: Before serving, place your glass in the freezer for a few minutes to chill.
  • Serve right away: Since it’s sparkling, this spritz is best made just before serving.
  • Different Citrus: Try using blood orange or grapefruit for a slightly more bitter flavor.
Lambrusco spritz with olives and orange slice.

Serving Suggestions

Serve this Lambrusco Spritz as a cocktail for a fall or holiday dinner.

It pairs beautifully with Mediterranean-inspired dishes like my Spanish Chicken Stew with Olives or Fig and Prosciutto Pizza. It’s also a fun choice for a cocktail hour before Thanksgiving dinner!

More Drink Recipes to Try

  • This delicious lambrusco spritz cocktail is served with a salt and sugar rim and garnished with olives, olive oil and an orange slice.
    Lambrusco Spritz
  • Recipe for sweet and refreshing lychee mojito with cucumber and mint.
    Cucumber Lychee Mojito
  • Blended spicy mango margarita with a tajin rim.
    Spicy Mango Margarita
  • Creamy mango lassi with cardamom and topped with shredded coconut.
    Mango Lassi with Cardamom and Rose Water

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

This delicious lambrusco spritz cocktail is served with a salt and sugar rim and garnished with olives, olive oil and an orange slice.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Lambrusco Spritz

A bold, citrusy Lambrusco Spritz with a balance of bitter and bubbly. Finished with olives and olive oil, it’s sparkling, savory, and refreshingly different.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Cocktail
Cuisine: American, Italian
Keyword: Lambrusco cocktail, Lambrusco spritz
Servings: 1 cocktail
Calories: 286kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Ingredients

Sugar Salt Rim

  • 2 tablespoons sugar
  • 2 teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon orange zest

Cocktail

  • ½ ounce fresh orange juice
  • 1½ ounces Campari
  • 3 ounces Lambrusco sparkling red wine
  • Splash of sparkling water
  • Extra-virgin olive oil for garnish
  • Green olives and orange slice for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • On a small plate, combine the sugar, salt, and orange zest. Use your fingers to rub the zest into the sugar and salt until it’s evenly mixed and fragrant.
  • Run an orange wedge around the rim of your glass, then dip it into the salt-sugar mixture to coat.
  • Fill the glass with ice. Add the orange juice, Campari and Lambrusco, then top with a splash of sparkling water.
  • Drizzle a few drops of olive oil on top, then garnish with olives on a skewer and an orange slice. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Chill your glass: Before serving, place your glass in the freezer for a few minutes to chill.
  • Serve right away: Since it’s sparkling, this spritz is best made just before serving.
  • Different Citrus: Try using blood orange or grapefruit for a slightly more bitter flavor.

Nutrition

Calories: 286kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 4655mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 34IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 0.5mg

Stuffed Acorn Squash with Ground Beef and Spiced Rice (Hashweh)

Oct 12, 2025 · 3 Comments

Roasted acorn squash stuffed with spiced rice and ground beef.

Tender roasted acorn squash is filled with a spiced Lebanese-inspired rice mixture called hashweh, made with ground beef, warm spices, basmati rice, sweet dried cranberries, and toasted pine nuts. Every bite is a blend of savory, sweet, and nutty flavors that’s comforting, aromatic, and perfect for fall!

Stuffed acorn squash with a spiced rice and ground meat mixture called hashweh with pine nuts and dried cranberries.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This stuffed acorn squash is filled with a fragrant Lebanese-inspired spiced rice mixture called hashweh, made with ground beef, warm cinnamon and allspice, buttery toasted pine nuts, and a handful of tart dried cranberries. It’s hearty, aromatic, and full of textures with the perfect balance of both warm fall flavors and Middle Eastern inspiration.

As you eat the stuffed squash, scoop a spoonful of the roasted squash with the savory meat and rice mixture. You’ll get savory, sweet and warm spiced flavors in every bite and the toasted pine nuts bring a delicious crunch that ties everything together.

If you love this flavor combination, try my Roasted Kabocha Squash with Tahini and Pomegranate for another fall favorite, or see my traditional Hashweh rice recipe that inspired this dish.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for stuffed acorn squash with ground beef, pine nuts, rice and spices.
  • Acorn squash: Choose ones that feel heavy for their size and have a firm, matte skin. If you prefer, kabocha or delicata squash also work well.
  • Basmati rice: I love India Gate basmati rice for its long, light grains. Rinse the rice a few times before cooking, so it removes extra starch for a more delicate bite.
  • Ground beef: Use good-quality 80/20 beef for a tender, flavorful filling. You can also substitute with ground lamb or a mix of both.
  • Warm spices: A blend of cinnamon, allspice, cumin and nutmeg gives the dish that signature Lebanese depth and warmth that complements the natural sweetness of the squash.
  • Pine nuts: Toasted in a bit of ghee or clarified butter until golden and nutty. I like to store pine nuts in the freezer since they’re high in oils and can go rancid over time.
  • Dried cranberries: Add a subtle sweetness that balances the savory meat. You can also use barberries or currants for a more traditional twist.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Squash options: Use the same meat and rice stuffing with kabocha squash or delicata squash for a similar sweet flavor and creamy texture.
  • Nuts: Swap pine nuts for toasted slivered almonds or chopped walnuts.
  • Protein: Substitute ground beef with lamb, veal, or a mix.
  • Vegetarian version: Skip the meat and bulk up the filling with chopped mushrooms and sautéed spinach or lentils.
  • Dried Fruit: Use dried currants, barberries, or golden raisins instead of cranberries.

⏲️ Instructions

Roast the acorn squash until halfway cooked, before adding the rice filling.

Roast the Squash: Brush the acorn squash with olive oil, season with allspice and salt, and roast until halfway cooked so it holds its shape for stuffing.

Cook the hashweh mixture until basmati rice is cooked through.

Cook the Beef and Rice: Sauté the ground beef and onions until browned, then add garlic and warm spices. Stir in basmati rice and chicken stock, cover, and cook until the rice is fluffy and fragrant.

Toast pine nuts in a pan with ghee until lightly golden.

Toast the Pine Nuts: Toast the pine nuts in a little ghee until golden, then remove and set aside.

Fill the beef and rice mixture into the acorn squash halves and continue baking until squash is cooked through.

Stuff and Bake: Combine the rice mixture with toasted pine nuts, dried cranberries, and parsley. Spoon into each squash half, bake until tender, and garnish with more pine nuts and herbs.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Prep the squash: Before slicing in half, trim a small piece off the bottom so the halves sit flat while baking.
  • Toasting pine nuts: Keep an eye on the pine nuts when toasting and remove them from heat as soon as they turn golden, so they don’t burn.
  • Make-ahead tip: The meat and rice filling can be made up to 2 days ahead and refrigerated until ready to stuff.
  • Extra filling: Depending how large the squash cavity is, you may have a little leftover hashweh mixture, which is delicious on its own or spooned over greens or roasted veggies.
  • Check for doneness: To make sure the squash is fully cooked, insert the tip of a paring knife into the thickest part of the flesh and if it slides in easily, it’s ready.
Stuffed acorn squash with Hashweh, a Middle Eastern spiced rice mixture.

Serving Suggestions

Serve stuffed acorn squash as a gluten-free main course for a weeknight dinner or even as a beautiful side for a fall gathering or Thanksgiving table. It pairs wonderfully with:

  • Shredded Brussels Sprouts Salad with Pecorino
  • Chopped Kale Salad with Creamy Tahini Dressing
  • Roasted Carrots and Pears with Pomegranate

More Squash Recipes to Try

  • Butternut squash risotto with fried sage and Parmesan cheese.
    Butternut Squash Risotto with Crispy Sage
  • Mediterranean Lentil Stuffed Delicata Squash
  • Creamy butternut squash and pear soup.
    Butternut Squash and Pear Soup
  • Parmesan Roasted Delicata Squash with Sage
    Parmesan Roasted Delicata Squash with Sage

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Roasted acorn squash stuffed with spiced rice and ground beef.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Stuffed Acorn Squash with Ground Beef and Spiced Rice (Hashweh)

This aromatic stuffed acorn squash recipe is filled with a mixture of spiced ground beef, basmati rice, pine nuts, and cranberries. A Middle Eastern-inspired fall dinner full of warm, aromatic flavors!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time50 minutes mins
Cooling10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American, Lebanese, Mediterranean
Keyword: acorn squash stuffed with rice, rice stuffed acorn squash, stuffed acorn squash
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 546kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Ingredients

For the Acorn Squash

  • 2 acorn squash
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For the Spiced Rice Filling

  • 2 tablespoons ghee divided
  • ½ pound ground beef or ground lamb
  • ½ medium yellow onion finely diced
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon allspice
  • Pinch of nutmeg
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • Freshly ground black pepper to taste
  • ½ cup uncooked basmati rice rinsed several times
  • 1 cup low-sodium chicken stock
  • ¼ cup pine nuts
  • ¼ cup dried cranberries or barberries/currants
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment or foil.
  • Prepare the squash: Wash and dry the acorn squash. Slice each one in half horizontally and scoop out the seeds. Trim a small piece off the bottom of each half so it sits flat on the baking sheet.
  • Roast the squash: Brush the cut sides with olive oil and season with allspice and salt. Place cut side down on the baking sheet and roast for 25–30 minutes, until just tender but not too soft. Remove from the oven and let cool slightly.
  • Make the filling: While the squash roasts, heat 1 tablespoon of ghee in a medium pot over medium heat. Add the ground beef and onion and cook until the beef is browned and the onion has softened, about 5–7 minutes.
  • Add garlic and spices: Stir in the garlic, cinnamon, cumin, allspice, nutmeg, salt, and black pepper. Cook another minute until fragrant.
  • Add rice and stock: Stir in the rinsed basmati rice and chicken stock. Add the remaining tablespoon of ghee. Bring to a boil, then reduce to low, cover, and cook until the rice is tender, about 15 minutes.
  • Toast the pine nuts: While the rice cooks, melt a little ghee in a small skillet over medium heat. Add pine nuts and toast, stirring often, until golden and fragrant. Remove from heat immediately so they don’t burn — they’ll continue to darken slightly as they cool.
  • Finish the filling: Fluff the cooked rice with a fork, then stir in the toasted pine nuts (reserve a few for garnish), dried cranberries, and chopped parsley.
  • Stuff and bake: Spoon a generous amount of the rice mixture into each roasted squash half, drizzle lightly with olive oil, and return to the oven. Bake for another 20 minutes, until the squash is fully tender and the tops are lightly golden. Cover loosely with foil if they brown too quickly.
  • Serve: Let cool slightly, then garnish with reserved pine nuts and extra parsley. Serve warm.

Notes

  • Prep the squash: Before slicing in half, trim a small piece off the bottom so the halves sit flat while baking.
  • Toasting pine nuts: Keep an eye on the pine nuts when toasting and remove them from heat as soon as they turn golden, so they don’t burn.
  • Make-ahead tip: The meat and rice filling can be made up to 2 days ahead and refrigerated until ready to stuff.
  • Extra filling: Depending how large the squash cavity is, you may have a little leftover hashweh mixture which is delicious on its own or spooned over greens or roasted veggies.
  • Check for doneness: To make sure the squash is fully cooked, insert the tip of a paring knife into the thickest part of the flesh and if it slides in easily, it’s ready.

Nutrition

Calories: 546kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 59mg | Sodium: 497mg | Potassium: 1036mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 791IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 4mg

Julia Child's Beef Bourguignon

Oct 10, 2025 · 20 Comments

Julia Child French beef bourguignon recipe with mushrooms and red wine.

Beef Bourguignon is a classic French stew with tender beef in a rich red wine sauce and buttery mushrooms. This version stays true to Julia Child’s beloved recipe, with a few simplified steps along the way.

Julia Child's French beef bourguignon with red wine, mushrooms and herbs.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Julia Child’s Beef Bourguignon is a decadent, slow-braised French beef stew layered with rich, savory flavor. Tender chunks of beef gently simmer in a red wine sauce with carrots, onions, bacon, and herbs until they’re melt-in-your-mouth tender.

It’s truly a labor of love! Over the years, I’ve made a few adjustments to create a slightly simplified version of Julia’s beloved French classic, that still delivers every bit of that deep, luxurious flavor. Every bite is rich, comforting, and absolutely worth the time it takes! If you love Julia’s timeless French recipes, try Julia Child's Coq au Vin or the even more show-stopping Julia Child's Cheese Souffle.

A few years ago, I had the honor of participating in an international online celebration of Julia Child hosted by Alfred A. Knopf, where bloggers from around the world cooked through her recipes. That experience taught me so much about French technique and deepened my appreciation for Julia’s timeless approach to food, and inspired me to create a collection of The Best Julia Child Recipes.

Recipe Updates & Simplifications

I've made beef bourguignon quite a few times and found that there are a few steps from the classic recipe that can certainly be simplified.

  • Skip the bacon boil: Julia’s original method has you boil and then sauté the lardons. I skip the boiling step and simply render the bacon directly in the pan, which gives the stew a lovely smoky depth.
  • Streamlined flour step: Instead of roasting the beef after dusting it with flour, I coat it lightly before browning — less fuss, same great texture.
  • One pan for mushrooms and onions: Julia cooks mushrooms and pearl onions separately, but I combine them for ease. They still get beautifully browned and soak up all that gorgeous red wine flavor.
  • A splash of cognac: This isn’t in Julia’s original version, but I love the subtle depth it adds — and the little flare moment when you flambé it!

Every time I make this, I’m reminded why it’s one of the most iconic recipes in the world: it’s indulgent, comforting, and unforgettable.

📋 Ingredients

Here’s what you’ll need to make this luxurious French beef stew:

  • Beef stew meat: Look for beef chuck roast and buy it in one large piece and cut it into cubes. That way the pieces are uniform and brown evenly.
  • Bacon: Julia calls for lardons, but I use regular bacon cut into pieces. Cook it until the fat renders and some pieces start to crisp, but don’t overdo it, you’ll want that flavorful bacon fat for searing the beef.
  • Mushrooms: Button or cremini mushrooms both work great. I prefer to quarter them instead of slicing, as they hold their shape and give the stew a heartier feel.
  • Pearl onions: I highly recommend frozen pearl onions that are already peeled and cook much faster. If you can only find fresh ones, peel them and sauté or braise in butter and red wine for 20–30 minutes before adding.
  • Red wine: Use a medium to full-bodied dry red wine that you enjoy drinking, such as Burgundy, Côtes du Rhône, or Cabernet Sauvignon and avoid anything sweet.
  • Cognac (optional): Not in Julia’s original recipe, but I love the subtle sweetness that it adds and pairs beautifully with the mushrooms and herbs.
  • Herbs: A few sprigs of fresh thyme and a couple of bay leaves, tied together with kitchen twine for easy removal later.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Beef: Chuck roast is ideal, but if you have another cut labeled “stew beef,” it’ll work as long as it’s well-marbled.
  • Wine-free version: You can replace the wine with a mix of beef broth and a splash of balsamic vinegar for depth.
  • Pork-free: Skip the bacon and use a tablespoon of butter or olive oil for browning. You’ll lose the smoky note, but it’ll still be delicious.
  • Add-ins: For a rustic twist, add a handful of baby potatoes or chopped parsnips during the last hour of braising.

⏲️ Instructions

Pat the beef dry, then season with salt and pepper and lightly coat with flour — this helps it brown beautifully when seared.

Season and flour the beef: Pat the beef dry and season with salt and pepper and lightly coat with flour.

Render the bacon until some pieces are crisp and the fat has melted. That flavorful fat becomes the base for searing the beef.

Cook the bacon: Render the bacon until some pieces are crisp and the fat has melted.

Brown the beef in batches until golden on all sides. Don’t overcrowd the pan; a deep crust means rich flavor later.

Sear the beef: Brown the beef in batches, on all sides, making sure to not overcrowd the pan.

Cook the onions, carrots, and garlic until softened and lightly golden. This builds a flavorful foundation for the sauce.

Sauté the vegetables: Cook the onions, carrots, and garlic until softened and lightly golden. Add tomato paste and cook for another minute.

Pour in the cognac (and carefully flambé if you’d like!), then add the red wine and scrape up the browned bits from the pan. Let the wine reduce slightly before moving on.

Add cognac and deglaze with wine: Pour in the cognac (and carefully flambé), then add red wine scraping up the browned bits and let the wine reduce.

Add the beef, bacon, herbs, and broth back to the pot. Bring to a simmer, cover, and transfer to the oven to slow-braise until tender.

Combine and braise: Add the beef, bacon, herbs, and broth back to the pot. Bring to a simmer, cover, and transfer to the oven to slow-braise.

After about 2 hours, the beef should be fork-tender and the sauce thickened. Skim off any excess fat on top if needed.

After braising: After about 2 hours, the beef should be fork-tender and the sauce thickened. Skim off any excess fat on top if needed.

In a separate pan, cook mushrooms and pearl onions in butter and a splash of wine until golden. This adds fresh flavor and texture.

Sauté mushrooms and pearl onions: In a separate pan, cook mushrooms and pearl onions in butter, wine and herbs until onions are tender.

Stir the mushrooms and onions into the stew. Toss gently to combine and let everything simmer together for a few minutes.

Combine and finish: Stir the mushrooms and onions into the stew and toss gently to combine.

Spoon the stew over mashed potatoes and sprinkle with fresh parsley. A glass of red wine on the side doesn’t hurt either.

Serve and enjoy: Serve the stew over mashed potatoes and garnish with fresh parsley. A glass of red wine on the side doesn’t hurt either.

Julia Child's French beef bourguignon with red wine, mushrooms and herbs.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the beef well: Use paper towels to pat the beef cubes completely dry, this ensures a good sear.
  • Use the bacon fat: After cooking the bacon, brown the beef right in that flavorful fat.
  • Work in batches: Don’t overcrowd the pan. You may need to sear the beef in 2–3 batches for a nice crust.
  • Cognac safety tip: If using a gas stove, turn the flame off before adding the cognac. Then carefully light it with a long lighter to flambé, if you like. (It’s mostly for show, you can also just let it simmer and reduce naturally.)
  • If using fresh pearl onions: Peel and braise them in red wine and butter for 20–30 minutes before adding to the stew.
  • Give it time: This stew needs at least 2 hours in the oven for the beef to tenderize and the sauce to reduce.
  • Skim excess fat (if needed): As the stew rests, some of the fat may rise to the surface. Use a spoon to remove any extra.

Serving Suggestions

Beef Bourguignon is rich, hearty and doesn’t need much alongside it. However, I love serving it over a bed of creamy garlic mashed potatoes or mashed parsnips (like the ones in my braised short ribs recipe).

A simple green salad with a light vinaigrette balances all that richness beautifully.

For wine, pour a glass of the same red you used in the stew, such as a Burgundy, Côtes du Rhône, or Cabernet Sauvignon. It’s the perfect match!

More Beef Recipes to Try

  • Individual Beef Wellington
  • Boneless rib roast on a plate with mashed potatoes.
    Herb Crusted Boneless Rib Roast
  • Chinese Beef Stew
  • Grilled Korean short ribs with rice and kimchi.
    Kalbi Beef (Korean Beef Short Ribs)
Julia Child's French beef bourguignon with red wine, mushrooms and herbs.
Print Recipe
4.74 from 46 votes

Julia Child’s Beef Bourguignon

A classic French beef stew with tender beef, a rich red wine sauce, and buttery herbed mushrooms. This version stays true to Julia Child’s beloved recipe, with just a few simplified steps.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time3 hours hrs
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: French
Keyword: beef bourguignon recipe, French beef stew, Julia child beef bourguignon, Julia child beef bourguignon recipe, Julia childs beef bourguignon
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 494kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $30

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • skillet

Ingredients

For the stew:

  • 6 ounces bacon cut into ¼-inch pieces
  • 2-21/2 pounds beef stew meat cut into 2-inch cubes
  • Salt and pepper
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour for dusting
  • 3 medium carrots peeled and sliced into ½-inch pieces
  • 1 small yellow onion thinly sliced
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • ¼ cup Cognac
  • 2 cups red wine
  • 2 ½ - 3 cups low-sodium beef stock add more if needed
  • 4-5 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 bay leaves

For the braised mushrooms and onions:

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 pound button or cremini mushrooms quartered
  • 1 cup frozen pearl onions
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves
  • 1 bay leaf
  • Salt and pepper
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350°F, This gives the oven a head start once the pot goes in.
  • Cook the bacon: Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place a Dutch oven over medium heat, add the bacon, and cook until the fat renders. Remove the bacon with a slotted spoon and set aside.
  • Sear the beef: Pat the beef cubes dry with paper towels, then season generously with salt and pepper. Lightly dust with flour. Increase the heat to medium-high and sear the beef in batches until browned on all sides, about 2–3 minutes per side. Set aside with the bacon.
  • Sauté the vegetables: In the same pot, add the carrots and onions. Cook for about 5 minutes, until softened. Stir in the garlic and cook for another minute, then add the tomato paste and cook for one more minute.
  • Deglaze with Cognac: Turn off the heat if using a gas stove. Carefully pour in the Cognac and ignite with a long lighter or match to burn off the alcohol (optional, but fun!). Once the flame subsides, scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the pot.
  • Add the liquids and herbs: Return the beef and bacon to the pot. Pour in the wine and enough beef stock to just cover the meat. Add the thyme and bay leaves, season with salt and pepper, and bring to a gentle simmer.
  • Braise in the oven: Cover and transfer the pot to the oven. Lower the temperature to 325°F and cook for 2½–3 hours, until the beef is fork-tender and the sauce has reduced by about a quarter.
  • Prepare the mushrooms and onions: While the stew cooks, heat butter and olive oil in a skillet over medium heat. Add the mushrooms and cook until browned and their moisture evaporates, about 10 minutes. Add the pearl onions, wine, thyme, bay leaf and a pinch of salt and pepper. Simmer until the wine has reduced and the onions are tender.
  • Combine and serve: When the beef is done, remove the bay leaves and thyme stems. Skim any excess fat from the top if needed. Stir in the mushroom and onion mixture, sprinkle with fresh parsley, and serve.

Notes

  • Dry the beef well: Pat the beef cubes completely dry before searing for the best crust.
  • Use the bacon fat: Brown the beef right in that flavorful bacon fat for extra depth.
  • Work in batches: Don’t overcrowd the pan, sear the beef in 2–3 batches for even browning.
  • Cognac tip: If using a gas stove, turn off the flame before adding the Cognac. Light carefully to flambé, or simply let it simmer to reduce.
  • Fresh pearl onions: If using fresh instead of frozen, peel and braise them in red wine and butter for 20–30 minutes before adding.
  • Slow and steady: The stew needs at least 2 hours in the oven for the beef to become tender and the sauce to thicken.

Nutrition

Calories: 494kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 27g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 76mg | Sodium: 482mg | Potassium: 1196mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5316IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 79mg | Iron: 4mg

Greek Braised Lamb Shanks

Oct 8, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Tender wine braised lamb shanks with cinnamon and herbs.

These Greek Braised Lamb Shanks are full of bold Mediterranean flavors with fresh herbs and a touch of cinnamon for warmth. The lamb shanks simmer in a rich red wine and tomato sauce until fall-off-the-bone tender! It is comforting, impressive and comes together easily in one pot.

Greek braised lamb shanks with red wine and cinnamon served over creamy polenta.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

These Greek braised lamb shanks is a stunning hearty one pot dish with bold Mediterranean flavors. Lamb shanks are braised in a mix of red wine, tomatoes, herbs and warm spices that perfectly complement the richness of the lamb.

As the shanks cook low and slow, the meat becomes melt in your mouth tender and the sauce reduces becoming even more flavorful.

This makes a show-stopping main course for holidays like Rosh Hashanah or even Thanksgiving in place of turkey. And you absolutely have to serve alongside creamy polenta or garlic mashed potatoes to soak up that incredible sauce!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for braised Greek lamb shanks with vegetables, cinnamon, allspice and fresh herbs.
  • Lamb shanks: A flavorful cut from the lower leg of the lamb, perfect for low and slow cooking. This cut is full of connective tissue so needs time to cook and break down down, which creates tender, fall-off-the-bone meat. (Huge thanks to Freedom Run Farms for the delicious American lamb!)
  • Vegetables: A classic mirepoix of chopped onion, celery, and carrot forms the flavorful base, just like for soups or short ribs.
  • Red wine: Choose a medium-bodied red wine that’s not too sweet and one you’d enjoy drinking, like a Cabernet Sauvignon or red table wine.
  • Tomato sauce: Use anything from crushed tomatoes to simple tomato sauce.
  • Fresh herbs: Rosemary, thyme, and oregano bring those Mediterranean notes together. Tie them with butcher’s string for easy removal later.
  • Warm spices: A cinnamon stick and a touch of allspice adds warmth and a subtle sweetness that pair beautifully with lamb.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Onions: Swap for shallots or leeks for a slightly sweeter flavor.
  • Herbs: If fresh herbs aren’t available, use about ½ teaspoon each of dried rosemary, thyme, and oregano when sautéing the vegetables.
  • Wine-free option: You can omit the wine and add 1–2 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar to the tomato and broth mixture for extra depth.

⏲️ Instructions

Sear the lamb shanks in olive oil until brown on all sides.

Sear the Lamb Shanks: Brown the lamb shanks on all sides in a hot Dutch oven until they develop a deep golden crust. Then remove and set aside.

Add red wine to the sautéed vegetables and let the wine reduce.

Sauté the Aromatics: Add the onion, celery, and carrot to the same pot and cook until softened, then stir in garlic. Deglaze with red wine, scraping up all the flavorful bits from the bottom.

Add herbs and stock to the seared lamb shanks and simmer until lamb is tender.

Build the Braise: Nestle the seared lamb shanks back into the pot, then pour in the beef stock and tomato sauce. Add the herb bundle, bay leaves, allspice and cinnamon stick.

Cook the red wine braised lamb shanks in the oven until the lamb is tender and sauce has reduced, about 2 hours.

Braise Until Tender: Cover and place in a 350°F oven for 2 hours until the lamb is fork-tender and the sauce has reduced into a rich, glossy finish.

How to Make Greek Braised Lamb Shanks (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the lamb well: Like any meat, use paper towels to dry the meat well. This helps the seasoning stick and ensures a good sear.
  • Sear in batches if needed: Don’t overcrowd the pan and make sure there’s room around the shanks when searing.
  • Liquid level: Make sure the braising liquid almost covers the lamb shanks. The meat needs enough liquid to stay moist while it cooks and reduces.
  • Make-ahead friendly: The flavors get even better overnight! Make this up to 2 days ahead, f needed.
Greek style braised lamb shanks with cinnamon, herbs and red wine.

Serving Suggestions

Greek braised lamb shanks is the definition of comfort food! Serve alongside:

  • Creamy Polenta
  • Garlic Mashed Potatoes
  • Greek Rice Pilaf
  • Mediterranean Rice
  • Persian Rice

Pair with a medium-bodied red wine (like Merlot or Syrah) and start with an appetizer like Baked Feta with Olives for a complete Mediterranean-inspired dinner.

More Lamb Recipes to Try

  • Turkish lahmacun with lamb and sumac onions.
    Lahmacun (Turkish Pizza)
  • Grilled chimichurri lamb chops served over a creamy herb yogurt sauce.
    Grilled Lamb Chops with Mint Chimichurri
  • Lamb shawarma roast served with pickled sumac onions and pita bread.
    Slow Cooked Lamb Shawarma
  • Pistachio crusted lamb chops that are cut with a medium rare center.
    Pistachio Crusted Lamb Chops

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Tender wine braised lamb shanks with cinnamon and herbs.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Greek Braised Lamb Shanks Recipe

These Greek braised lamb shanks are simmered low and slow in red wine, tomato, herbs and warm cinnamon. A simple one-pot meal that’s full of rich Mediterranean flavors!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
Total Time2 hours hrs 35 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Greek, Mediterranean
Keyword: braised lamb shanks, Greek braised lamb shanks, red wine braised lamb shanks
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 259kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • glass measuring cups
  • Silicone Spoon Spatula

Ingredients

  • 3-4 lamb shanks about 1–1½ pounds each
  • Salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • Olive oil as needed
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 2 celery stalks diced
  • 2 carrots chopped into ½ inch cubes
  • 3 garlic cloves finely diced
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 2½ cups beef stock
  • 1 cup tomato sauce or marinara
  • 2 rosemary sprig
  • 3-4 thyme sprigs
  • 3-4 oregano sprigs
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 cinnamon stick
  • ½ teaspoon allspice
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F (175°C).
  • Pat the lamb shanks dry with paper towels. Season generously with salt and pepper.
  • Heat a wide Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Add a drizzle of olive oil and sear the lamb shanks on all sides until deeply browned. Remove and set aside.
  • In the same pot, add more olive oil if needed. Sauté onion, celery, and carrot until they begin to soften, about 5–7 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for another minute.
  • Deglaze the pot with red wine, scraping up any browned bits from the bottom.
  • Return the lamb shanks to the pot and pour the tomato sauce and stock around the shanks. Add allspice and gently stir to combine.
  • Tie the rosemary, thyme and oregano with butcher string and nestle the herb bundle in the liquid, along with the bay leaves, and cinnamon stick.
  • Cover the Dutch oven and transfer to the oven. Braise for 2 hours, then uncover and continue cooking for another 15 minutes to slightly reduce the sauce.
  • Remove herb bundle and cinnamon stick before serving. Serve warm with your favorite sides.

Video

Notes

  • Dry the lamb: Pat dry for better browning and flavor.
  • Liquid level: Braising liquid should almost cover the shanks.
  • Make ahead: Even better the next day, can be made up to 2 days ahead.
  • Onion swap: Use shallots or leeks for a milder flavor.
  • Dried herbs: Use ½ teaspoon each dried rosemary, thyme, and oregano if fresh aren’t available.
  • No wine? Add 1–2 tablespoon balsamic vinegar instead for depth.

Nutrition

Calories: 259kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 723mg | Potassium: 999mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 5428IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 83mg | Iron: 4mg

Lemon Olive Oil Cake with Greek Yogurt

Sep 30, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Light and slightly sweet lemon olive oil cake with powdered sugar.

This lemon olive oil cake is lightly sweet, tangy and full of bright citrus flavor. It’s tender from Greek yogurt, bold from good olive oil, and the kind of easy cake you’ll be making on repeat!

Garnish the lemon olive oil cake with powdered sugar and lemon slices.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This lemon olive oil cake is full of bright citrus flavor with the most tender crumb, thanks to rich olive oil and tangy Greek yogurt. A whole lemon, both the zest and juice gives the cake its signature pucker with the perfect amount of sweet and tartness.

This would be fabulous with a cup of tea or coffee or after at the end of a Mediterranean inspired dinner of roast chicken with fennel and citrus or grilled salmon.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for lemon olive oil cake, including banilla paste, sugar, eggs and yogurt.
  • Olive Oil: This is the time to use good quality extra virgin olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Whole Lemons: Both the lemon zest and juice are added to the batter for extra lemony flavor. Use a microplane to zest the lemon.
  • Greek Yogurt: Use low fat or full fat plain Greek yogurt, which is thick and tangy.
  • Vanilla Paste: Thicker than extract and flecked with vanilla bean specks. You can use extract if that’s what you have.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Different Citrus: Try grapefruit, blood orange, Meyer lemon, or even lime for a twist. A combination of citrus would also be delicious.
  • Flour: I haven’t tested almond flour here, but a trusted 1:1 gluten-free flour blend should work.
  • Vanilla: Use vanilla extract if you don’t have paste.
  • Nuts: Add toasted slivered almonds or chopped pistachios to the batter for added texture and flavor.
  • Garnishes: Add fresh berries and whipped cream.

⏲️ Instructions

whisk together the wet ingredients for the lemon olive oil cake.

Mix Wet Ingredients: Whisk together olive oil, sugar, eggs, yogurt, lemon juice, zest, and vanilla until smooth.

Pour the lemon cake batter into a cheesecake pan lined with parchment paper.

Pour Batter: Transfer the batter into the prepared springform pan lined with parchment. Bake until golden and a toothpick comes out clean.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Pan choice: A springform cheesecake pan ensures the cake releases easily.
  • Parchment lining: I recommend lining just the bottom with parchment and spraying the sides with cooking spray. The parchment can crinkle on the sides and into the batter.
  • Testing doneness: Insert a toothpick in the center and if it comes out clean, the cake is ready.
  • Cooling: Let it cool slightly before slicing.
Light and sweet lemon olive oil cake with yogurt and vanilla.

Serving Suggestions

This olive oil cake pairs beautifully with a cup of tea or coffee. But also alongside other sweets or after a Mediterranean dinner.

  • Alongside baklava or pear ginger cake for a dessert spread.
  • After a light seafood dinner of seafood pasta or grilled shrimp with preserved lemons.

More Dessert Recipes to Try

  • Plate of homemade pistachio baklava doused in a honey syrup.
    Turkish Pistachio Baklava with Orange Blossom Syrup
  • Fruit Rose Tart with Rose Whipped Cream
  • Meyer Lemon Souffle
  • Plum Cake with Vanilla and Cinnamon

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Lemon olive oil cake with yogurt.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Lemon Olive Oil Cake with Greek Yogurt

This bright and tender lemon olive oil cake is made with fresh lemon zest and juice and tangy Greek yogurt. Perfect alongside coffee or tea!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: lemon olive oil cake, lemon yogurt cake, olive oil cake
Servings: 10 servings
Calories: 246kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Microplane
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Springform Pan

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 2 eggs
  • ¾ cup white sugar
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • ¼ cup fresh lemon juice
  • ½ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla paste or vanilla extract
  • Powdered sugar for dusting (optional)
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F. Grease a 9-inch springform pan with olive oil or butter, line the bottom with parchment paper, and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt.
  • In another bowl, whisk the olive oil, eggs, sugar, lemon zest, lemon juice, yogurt, and vanilla until smooth and well combined.
  • Add the wet ingredients to the dry ingredients and mix until just combined. Be careful not to overmix.
  • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and smooth the top.
  • Bake for about 40–45 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
  • Let the cake cool slightly in the pan before releasing. Dust with powdered sugar before serving, if desired.

Notes

  • Pan: Use a springform pan for easy release. Line the bottom with parchment and spray the sides.
  • Doneness: Bake until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  • Cooling: Let the cake cool slightly before slicing.
  • Citrus Variations: Try grapefruit, blood orange, Meyer lemon, or lime.
  • Add-ins: Stir in toasted almonds or pistachios for texture.
  • Garnish: Top with fresh berries and whipped cream.

Nutrition

Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 132mg | Potassium: 119mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 60IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 1mg

How to Host a Lobster Boil Party

Sep 28, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Lobster boil party with whole Main lobsters over boiled potatoes, corn and sausage.

Nothing says celebration quite like a lobster boil! Golden red lobsters, tender potatoes, smoky sausage, and corn all piled in the center of the table.  It’s festive, a little messy, and the most fun way to feed a crowd!

In this post, I’ll walk you through how to host a lobster boil and all the party essentials you’ll want on hand.

Lobster boil party with potatoes, corn and lemon.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🦞 About This Recipe

A lobster boil is the ultimate celebratory feast! And perfect for wrapping up summer, celebrating the Feast of the Seven Fishes, or checking off a true bucket-list party experience!

Whole lobsters are cooked until bright red and layered over tender potatoes, sweet corn, and smoky sausage that simmer in the most flavorful, slightly spicy broth.

Since everything cooks in layers, timing is key. Once done, scatter the veggies and sausage down the center of the table, pile the lobsters on top, and roll up your sleeves, it’s all about cracking, dipping, and eating together!

Huge thanks to ShopLobster for sending the freshest Maine lobsters right to my door! They made this unforgettable party possible!

🎉 What You’ll Need (Party Essentials)

Here are a few things that make the lobster boil easier, and more fun!

  • Large stockpot (16–20 qt)
  • Butcher paper for the table
  • Seafood crackers + picks for shells
  • Old Bay seasoning (lots of it!)
  • Frank's Hot Sauce
  • Mini pot for melted butter (I used mini Le Creuset pots)
  • Lobster bibs + napkins (trust me!)
  • Blue and white striped tablecloth
Samantha Ferraro holding a platter of cooked whole Main lobsters for the lobster boil.

📋 Ingredients for a Lobster Boil (6–8 people)

  • 8 whole lobsters (about 1 ¼–1 ½ lbs each)
  • 2 pounds baby potatoes
  • 6–8 ears of corn, cut in thirds
  • 2 pounds smoked sausage, such as andouille, cut into 1 inch pieces
  • 1–2 pounds shrimp, peeled and deveined

For the flavorful broth:

  • 3–4 lemons, halved
  • 2 onions, quartered
  • 1 head garlic, halved
  • 4–5 bay leaves
  • ½ cup Old Bay seasoning
  • Zatarain's Seafood Boil concentrate (a little goes a long way)
  • Salt + pepper

⏲️ Step-by-Step Timing

Here’s the basic order so everything cooks perfectly:

  1. Flavor the broth: Bring water to a boil and add Old Bay, Zatarain's concentrate lemons, garlic, onion, bay leaves, salt.
  2. Potatoes first: Add the potatoes and cook for 20 minutes, until nearly tender.
  3. Corn + sausage: Add the corn and sausage next and continue cooking for 10–12 minutes.
  4. Remove Vegetables and Add Lobsters: Remove the vegetables and sausage and keep warm. Add lobsters to the stock and cook 8–10 minutes, until shells turn bright red.
  5. Shrimp: Cook for just 2–3 minutes until pink.
  6. Drain and scatter everything down the table, serve with melted butter, and dig in!
Lobster boil stock with corn, potatoes, sausage and seasoned with Old Bay.
Remove the boiled potatoes and sausage before adding the lobsters.

🦪 Variations + Options

  • Add clams or mussels → Clean first (see my guide on how to clean clams) and add in the last 5–7 minutes so they steam open.
  • No whole lobsters? → Lobster tails work beautifully. Cook them at the same step, but only 5–6 minutes depending on size.
  • Smaller lobster boil (2–4 people) → Just cut everything in half. Perfect for a smaller gathering without losing the fun.

📍Tips for Hosting a Lobster Boil

  • Have 1-2 big bowl for shells.
  • Scatter small bowls of melted butter around the table.
  • Butcher paper for easy cleanup (just roll it up and toss!).
  • Bibs, paper towels, and extra napkins keep the fun stress-free.
  • Don’t overthink it, just have fun! It shold be casual and messy.

Serving Suggestions

  • Leftover lobster meat? Save it for lobster mac and cheese or decadent lobster thermidor.
  • Pair with a big green salad, plenty of bread, and crisp white wine or cold beer.

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Lobster boil party with whole Main lobsters over boiled potatoes, corn and sausage.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Lobster Boil Party

Host the ultimate lobster boil with tender potatoes, corn, sausage, and lobsters cooked in layers. Perfect for summer parties or holiday feasts!
Prep Time45 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Keyword: lobster boil, lobster boil party, seafood boil
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 1027kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • seafood crackers
  • butcher paper

Ingredients

For the broth:

  • 3-4 lemons halved
  • 2 onions quartered
  • 1 head garlic halved
  • 4 bay leaves
  • ½ cup Old Bay seasoning
  • 1-2 tablespoons Zatarain’s Seafood Boil concentrate a little goes a long way
  • Salt + pepper

For the boil:

  • 2 pounds baby potatoes
  • 6-8 ears of corn cut in thirds (fresh or frozen)
  • 2 pounds smoked sausage sliced into 1-inch pieces, such as andouille
  • 8 whole lobsters 1 ¼–1 ½ pounds each
  • 1-2 pounds shrimp peeled and deveined

To serve:

  • 1-2 pounds Melted butter
  • Hot sauce such as Frank's Red Hot
  • Lemon wedges
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the broth: Fill a large 16–20 qt stockpot with water (about 12 quarts, leaving room for ingredients). Add Old Bay, Zatarain’s, lemons, onions, garlic, bay leaves, salt, and pepper. Bring to a boil.
  • Cook the potatoes: Add potatoes and boil for 20 minutes, until nearly tender.
  • Add corn + sausage: Stir in corn and sausage. Continue boiling for 10–12 minutes.
  • Remove vegetables: Lift out potatoes, corn, and sausage with a slotted spoon. Transfer to a large baking dish or sheet pan and keep warm.
  • Cook lobsters: Carefully add lobsters to the broth (in batches if needed). Cook 8–10 minutes, until shells are bright red. Remove and keep warm.
  • Add shrimp: Toss shrimp into the hot broth and cook 2–3 minutes until pink.
  • Assemble + serve: Scatter potatoes, corn, and sausage down the center of a butcher-paper-lined table. Layer lobsters on top, add shrimp, and serve with bowls of melted butter, hot sauce, and lemon wedges.

Notes

  • Clams or mussels: Add in the last 5–7 minutes until they just open. (See my [guide to cleaning clams] for prep tips.)
  • Using lobster tails: Add at the same step as whole lobsters, but only cook 5–6 minutes.
  • Hosting a smaller boil (2–4 people): Halve the ingredients and cook in a smaller pot.
  • Party essentials: Butcher paper, lobster crackers, bibs, and big bowls for shells keep things fun and easy.

Nutrition

Calories: 1027kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 79g | Saturated Fat: 40g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 362mg | Sodium: 1879mg | Potassium: 1267mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1678IU | Vitamin C: 51mg | Calcium: 204mg | Iron: 5mg

Kanafe with Ricotta and Shredded Phyllo

Sep 26, 2025 · 4 Comments

Kanafe is shredded phyllo with melty cheese in the center and soaked in simple syrup.

Kanafe is a fragrant Middle Eastern dessert with golden shredded phyllo, gooey melted cheese and soaked in a sweet orange blossom syrup. It's perfectly sweet, floral, nutty and steals the show every single time!

Kanafe filled with melty cheese and topped with chopped pistachios.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Kanafe is a traditional Middle Eastern dessert and a close cousin to baklava, with shredded phyllo (called kataif) and a gooey layer of melty cheese inside. Once baked, the golden dessert is soaked in a fragrant orange blossom simple syrup and topped with pistachios.

Traditionally, a "sweet cheese" is used, but I've found that part-skim mozzarella and thick creamy ricotta works very well, and I love the slightly savory cheese with the sweet syrup. And a touch of saffron gives the phyllo a beautiful golden color and subtle floral flavor.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for kanafeh, including shredded phyllo, ricotta cheese, saffron and orange blossom water.
  • Shredded Phyllo (Kataif): You can usually find it in Middle Eastern or specialty markets, in the freezer section. It comes in very long strands, so you’ll want to pulse it in the food processor to break it up into shorter pieces (it can get a little messy, but just go with it!).
  • Mozzarella: Look for a dry mozzarella that is not in brine and slice thin.
  • Ricotta Cheese: Look for a thicker and drier ricotta cheese. Drain the ricotta with a sieve over a bowl for as long as you have to prevent sogginess.
  • Orange Blossom Water: A little goes a long way. You can often find it in Middle Eastern stores or online.
  • Saffron Water: I always keep a jar of this saffron water on hand or you can take a pinch of saffron threads and steep in 1-2 tablespoons of water.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Phyllo sheets – If you can’t find kataif, you could try layering traditional phyllo sheets. Brush each sheet with butter, layer half of them, add the cheese in the center, then finish with the rest.
  • Cheese – Mozzarella + ricotta is my favorite combo, but you can also try all mozzarella. Halloumi could work too, though it’s a bit heavier. I’d skip feta, it’s too salty here.
  • Nuts – Pistachios are traditional, but walnuts or almonds would also be delicious.
  • Floral water – Rose water can replace orange blossom water for a slightly different but equally lovely flavor.
  • Simple syrup – Add whole spices for more flavor, such as a cinnamon stick, a few strips of citrus peel, or even a couple of cardamom pods.

⏲️ Instructions

Add the ricotta to a fine strainer to strain excess liquid.

Drain the ricotta: Place ricotta in a fine mesh strainer or cheesecloth over a bowl and drain to remove excess moisture.

Mix the melter butter with the shredded phyllo, making sure every strand is coated evenly.

Prepare the kataif: Pulse the kataif in a food processor to break it down, then transfer to a bowl and add melted butter and saffron. Work the butter into the phyllo until evenly coated.

Press the bottom layer of the shredded phyllo into your dish.

Prepare the bottom layer: Press half of the buttered kataif into the bottom in an even layer.

Layer the sliced mozzarella and spread the ricotta cheese on top of the shredded phyllo.

Add cheese layer: Layer mozzarella and spread ricotta on top, then cover with the remaining kataif, pressing firmly to compact everything.

Pour the orange blossom simple syrup on top of the baked kanafe.

Bake the kanafe: Bake at 350°F for 35–40 minutes, until golden brown and crisp. Slowly pour syrup over the hot kanafe.

Sliced kanafe with cheese in the center.

Serve: Garnish with chopped pistachios, cut into slices, and serve warm.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Breaking down the kataif – The shredded phyllo comes in very long strands. Pulse it in the food processor in batches to make it easier to work with.
  • Coating with butter – Really massage the melted butter into the kataif with your hands (gloves help!). Every strand should be evenly coated for the best texture.
  • Draining ricotta – Place the ricotta in a fine-mesh strainer or cheesecloth over a bowl and let it drain for at least an hour, or overnight if you can. A thicker, drier ricotta will prevent sogginess.
  • Baking dish – A tart pan or round cake pan works great. Just be sure to butter it well so the kanafe releases easily.
Kanafe topped with chopped pistachios and orange blossom water.

Serving Suggestions

Kanafe is often served warm, fresh from the oven, with syrup poured over the top. Pair it with:

  • A cup of strong coffee or tea.
  • Alongside pistachio baklava or other Middle Eastern sweets for a dessert spread.
  • After a Mediterranean spread of beef kebabs, fattoush salad, or Persian jeweled rice.
  • For a fun twist, serve small squares alongside Italian treats like tiramisu truffles during the holidays.

More Desserts to Try

  • Plate of homemade pistachio baklava doused in a honey syrup.
    Turkish Pistachio Baklava with Orange Blossom Syrup
  • Simple summer dessert recipe, charred peaches with creamy and tangy labneh and topped with sweet honey and tart pomegranate seeds.
    Charred Peaches with Vanilla Honey Labneh and Pomegranate
  • Recipe for amaretto tiramisu.
    Amaretto Tiramisu
  • Mini cannoli cups with mascarpone and ricotta and topped with candied cherries, pistachios and mini chocolate chips.
    Mini Cannoli Cups
Kanafe is shredded phyllo with melty cheese in the center and soaked in simple syrup.
Print Recipe
5 from 6 votes

Kanafe with Ricotta and Shredded Phyllo

Kanafe is a Middle Eastern dessert that is filled with cheese and layered with shredded phyllo that is finished with an orange simple syrup.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Middle Eastern
Keyword: kanafe, kunafe
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 665kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • vegetable peeler
  • Food Processor
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Cooking Gloves

Ingredients

Kanafe:

  • 1 16 oz package kataif (shredded phyllo), thawed if frozen
  • 12 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 1 tablespoon saffron water optional or a drop of red food coloring for color
  • 8 ounces part-skim mozzarella sliced thin or shredded
  • 16 ounces whole milk ricotta cheese drained at least 30 minutes (or overnight)
  • ½ cup chopped pistachios for garnish
  • Orange or lemon zest optional, for garnish

Simple Syrup:

  • 2 cups sugar
  • 1 cup water
  • 2-3 strips of lemon or orange peel
  • 1 tablespoon orange blossom water
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Drain the ricotta: Place ricotta in a fine mesh strainer or cheesecloth over a bowl. Let drain for at least 30 minutes, or overnight if possible, to remove excess moisture.
  • Make the syrup: In a small saucepan, combine sugar, water, and orange peel. Bring to a gentle boil, stirring until the sugar dissolves. Simmer 5–7 minutes until slightly thickened. Remove from heat, discard peel, and stir in orange blossom water. Set aside to cool.
  • Prepare the kataif: Gently pull apart the shredded phyllo and pulse it in a food processor in batches to shorten the strands. Place in a large bowl, then pour over melted butter (and saffron water if using). Work the butter into the phyllo with your hands until evenly coated.
  • Assemble: Butter a round tart pan or baking dish. Press half of the buttered kataif into the bottom in an even layer. Spread mozzarella and drained ricotta on top, then cover with the remaining kataif, pressing firmly to compact everything.
  • Bake: Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 35–40 minutes, until golden brown and crisp on top.
  • Finish: Remove from the oven and slowly pour the cooled syrup over the hot kanafe. Let rest at least 10 minutes so the syrup soaks in.
  • Serve: Garnish with chopped pistachios, optional citrus zest and cut into slices, and serve warm.

Notes

  • Breaking down the kataif – The shredded phyllo comes in very long strands. Pulse it in the food processor in batches to make it easier to work with.
  • Coating with butter – Really massage the melted butter into the kataif with your hands (gloves help!). Every strand should be evenly coated for the best texture.
  • Draining ricotta – Place the ricotta in a fine-mesh strainer or cheesecloth over a bowl and let it drain for at least an hour, or overnight if you can. A thicker, drier ricotta will prevent sogginess.
  • Baking dish – A tart pan or round cake pan works great. Just be sure to butter it well so the kanafe releases easily.

Nutrition

Calories: 665kcal | Carbohydrates: 74g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 92mg | Sodium: 399mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 51g | Vitamin A: 935IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 360mg | Iron: 2mg

Red and Yellow Beet Soup

Sep 20, 2025 · 3 Comments

Red and yellow beet soup with fresh dill.

This vibrant red and yellow beet soup is as stunning to look at as it is to eat. Sweet, earthy beets are blended into two purées and layered together for a vibrant and flavorful twist on classic borscht.

Vegetarian beet soup with red and yellow beets.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This colorful beet soup takes the sweet, earthy flavors of beets and gives them a delicious modern spin. Inspired by traditional borscht that I grew up with, this version keeps the flavors clean and bright by highlighting the beets themselves.

Here, I separate the red and golden beets into two different purées. The red beets are flavored with warm cumin and pureed with potatoes, carrots and other aromatics, mimicking the flavors of classic borscht. And the golden beets are blended with fresh ginger and earthy turmeric that pair so well with the mild yellow beets.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for beet soup including potatoes, shallots, vegetable stock and fresh dill.
  • Beets (red and golden) – Peel the beets with a vegetable peeler before chopping. Wear gloves for red beets (they stain), and prep golden beets first so they don’t pick up the red color.
  • Carrots, potatoes, onion – Classic beet soup vegetables that add body and flavor.
  • Fresh ginger – Peel with a vegetable peeler and grate with a microplane for a fresh, peppery kick.
  • Turmeric – Use ground or fresh root (peel and grate if fresh). Like beets, it stains easily, so gloves help.
  • Vegetable stock – Store-bought or homemade vegetable stock (save veggie scraps to make your own).

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Beet greens: Fry them for a crunchy garnish. Pat the leaves dry and shallow fry in olive oil for a few seconds on each side until crisp.
  • Single-color version: Make only the red beet or only the yellow beet soup if you prefer not to layer.
  • Texture: Blend until smooth, or leave the soup a bit chunky for a rustic feel.
  • Garnishes: Swap dill for fresh chives or parsley, or add a spoonful of yogurt or sour cream for a creamy finish.

⏲️ Instructions

Cook the beet soup until the beets and potatoes are fork tender.

Make the red beet soup. Sauté shallot, garlic, cumin in olive oil. Add red beets, carrot and potato and pour in vegetable stock. Season and cook until very tender. Purée until smooth.

Cook the yellow beet soup until the beets are fork tender.

Make the yellow beet soup. Sauté shallot, garlic, grated ginger, and turmeric in olive oil. Add golden beets and vegetable stock, season, and cook until very tender. Purée until smooth.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Cook until tender – Make sure the vegetables are very soft before blending for the smoothest texture.
  • Use two pots – Keeps colors bright. If you only have one, cook the golden beets first, then rinse before making the red soup.
  • Blending – An immersion blender is easiest, but a regular blender works too (just cool slightly first).
  • Layering – Ladle one color first, then gently spoon the second soup on top for clean layers.
Red and yellow beet soup garnished with olive oil and fresh dill.

Serving Suggestions

This soup makes a beautiful starter for holiday meals and special occasions. It pairs especially well with:

  • Rosh Hashanah or Passover dinners as a first course.
  • Serve alongside braised brisket, roasted chicken, or pistachio crusted lamb.
  • Or seafood dishes, such as herbed salmon or panko crusted halibut.
  • A fresh kale salad with apples and feta cheese and crusty bread for a lighter meal.

More Beet Recipes to Try

  • This will be your new favorite hummus! Sweet roasted beets and smoky cumin are added to homemade hummus creating the most stunning, vibrant and delicious creamy hummus.
    Roasted Beet Hummus
  • Red and yellow oven baked beet chips are served alongside a creamy lemon labneh dip.
    Baked Beet Chips with Creamy Labneh Dip
  • Beet Cured Lox
    Beet and Dill Cured Lox
  • Quinoa Salad with Roasted Beets, Blood Orange and Feta

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Red and yellow beet soup with fresh dill.
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Red and Yellow Beet Soup

A vibrant two-toned beet soup that layers red and golden beet purées for both color and flavor. The red soup is spiced with warm cumin, while the golden beet soup is brightened with fresh ginger and turmeric.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time50 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Soup
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: beet soup, creamy beet soup, red beet soup, yellow beet soup
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 201kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Immersion Blender
  • Chef Knife
  • Microplane
  • Cooking Gloves

Ingredients

For the Red Beet Soup

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ shallot finely chopped
  • 1 to 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 3 medium red beets peeled and chopped
  • 1 cup Yukon gold potatoes chopped (about 3 to 4 small–medium potatoes)
  • 1 cup carrots peeled and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 pinch cayenne pepper optional
  • 3 cups vegetable stock
  • Salt and black pepper to taste

For the Yellow Beet Soup

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ shallot finely chopped
  • 1 to 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 3 medium golden beets peeled and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon grated fresh ginger about ½-inch piece
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • 3 cups vegetable stock
  • Salt and black pepper to taste

For Serving

  • Fresh dill
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a medium pot over medium heat. Add the shallot and garlic and cook until softened, about 3 to 4 minutes. Stir in the cumin and cayenne (if using).
  • Add the red beets, carrots, potatoes, and vegetable stock. Season with salt and black pepper. Bring to a boil, then reduce heat to medium-low. Cover and simmer until the vegetables are very tender, about 40 to 45 minutes. Blend until smooth and set aside.
  • In a separate pot, heat olive oil over medium heat. Add the shallot and garlic and cook until softened, about 3 to 4 minutes. Stir in the ginger and turmeric until fragrant, about 30 seconds.
  • Add the golden beets and vegetable stock. Season with salt and black pepper. Bring to a boil, then reduce to medium-low. Cover and simmer until the vegetables are very tender, about 40 to 45 minutes. Blend until smooth.
  • To serve, ladle one soup into bowls, then gently spoon the second soup on top to create layers. Garnish with fresh dill and a drizzle of olive oil.

Notes

  • Cook until tender – Make sure the vegetables are very soft before blending for the smoothest texture.
  • Use two pots – Keeps colors bright. If you only have one, cook the golden beets first, then rinse before making the red soup.
  • Blending – An immersion blender is easiest, but a regular blender works too (just cool slightly first).
  • Layering – Ladle one color first, then gently spoon the second soup on top for clean layers.

Nutrition

Calories: 201kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 1534mg | Potassium: 796mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 6156IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

Dutch Oven Roast Chicken

Sep 12, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Recipe for Dutch oven roast chicken with lemon, herbs and vegetables.

This Dutch oven roast chicken is one of my back pocket recipes. Golden, juicy roast chicken with tender vegetables and loads of fresh herbs. It's simple, flavorful and the kind of meal that’s always in my dinner rotation.

Dutch oven roast chicken seasoned with a flavorful herb compound butter and roasted vegetables.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

This Dutch oven roast chicken is a dish I’ve been making for years, and it never fails. The whole chicken turns out perfectly juicy with crisp golden skin, while the carrots, onions, and garlic roast in the buttery drippings until sweet and tender.

Have fun customizing, using whatever herbs and vegetables are available. The best part is that it comes together in one pot and the combination of the savory chicken with the herbaceous compound butter is rich, bright and the kind of dinner you'll want to add to your dinner rotation.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for whole roasted chicken including carrots, onion, butter, lemon and herbs.
  • Whole chicken: I like to choose a chicken that is around 4-5 lbs. Look for one that feels plump and fresh.
  • Butter (unsalted): Using unsalted butter lets you control the salt level. The butter is melted with herbs and aromatics creating a flavorful compound mixture.
  • Lemon: Zest and juice go into the butter mixture for brightness. Save the used lemon halves and tuck them inside the chicken for even more flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Rosemary, thyme, tarragon, and oregano are my go-tos. They bring freshness and aroma to the butter. If fresh herbs aren’t available, substitute with ½–¾ teaspoon dried.
  • Paprika: Adds subtle flavor and a beautiful golden color. Use smoked paprika if you prefer a smoky note.
  • Carrots & onions: Sturdy, sweet vegetables that hold up beautifully to roasting.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Chicken: No whole chicken? Try bone-in, skin-on chicken thighs. They’ll roast in less time but still turn out juicy and flavorful.
  • Vegetables: Swap in parsnips, rutabaga, fennel, or shallots, anything hearty that holds up to roasting.
  • Paprika: Use smoked paprika for a deeper, smoky flavor.
  • Herbs: Fresh herbs are best, but dried work in a pinch. Use about ½–¾ teaspoon each.

⏲️ Instructions

Melt the butter with chopped garlic, paprika and herbs.

Make the Compound Butter: In a small pot, melt the butter and add the chopped garlic, herbs, lemon zest and juice and spices.

Rub the melted compound butter all over the whole chicken before roasting.

Season the Chicken: Rub the compound butter all over the chicken and under the skin and place in Dutch oven with vegetables.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the chicken well: Pat the chicken thoroughly with paper towels before seasoning. For even crispier skin, refrigerate it uncovered on a rack for a few hours (or overnight).
  • Get under the skin: Use your hands (rings off!) to gently work the butter mixture under the breast skin for maximum flavor.
  • Uniform veggies: Cut carrots, onions, and potatoes into even pieces so they cook evenly.
  • Control browning: Roast uncovered first, then cover if the chicken gets too dark. Finish uncovered at high heat for golden skin.
  • Rest before carving: Let the chicken rest 10–15 minutes so juices redistribute.
Whole roasted chicken in Dutch oven with roasted vegetables.

What To Do with Leftovers

One of the best parts of roasting a whole chicken is that the leftovers can stretch into other meals. Here are a few of my favorite ways to repurpose roast chicken:

  • Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad – Toss shredded chicken with pasta, crisp romaine, and a creamy Caesar dressing.
  • Chicken Tacos – Warm shredded chicken with a little sazon or taco seasoning and pile into tortillas with toppings.
  • Mediterranean Crispy Rice Salad – Toss chicken into rice with fresh herbs and chickpeas for even more protein.
  • Soups & Stews – Add shredded chicken to a pot of Persian lime chicken soup or Lemon Matzo Ball Soup or any veggie-packed soup.
  • Sandwiches & Wraps – Layer into pita with hummus and cucumbers, or make a classic chicken salad sandwich.

Don’t forget to save the carcass! It makes a deeply flavorful homemade chicken stock. Just add to vegetable stock and simmer.

Serving Suggestions

  • Pair with a bright salad: an arugula-pear salad or a shredded Brussels sprouts salad both balance the richness.
  • Serve with crusty bread to soak up the buttery pan juices.
  • Wine pairing: a crisp white wine like Sauvignon Blanc or a lighter Chardonnay complements the herbs and lemon.

More Chicken Recipes to Try

  • One pot chicken with saffron pearl couscous and zucchini.
    One Pot Israeli Couscous with Chicken
  • Spanish inspired chicken stew with olives and potatoes.
    Spanish Chicken Stew
  • Step by step instructions for Julia Child's Coq Au Vin, with stewed chicken in a rich buttery red wine sauce with sauteed mushrooms and pearl onions.
    Julia Child's Coq Au Vin Recipe
  • Sticky Hawaiian shoyu chicken thighs with rice and mac salad.
    Hawaiian Style Shoyu Chicken

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Recipe for Dutch oven roast chicken with lemon, herbs and vegetables.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Dutch Oven Roast Chicken

This Dutch oven roast chicken is flavored with an herbaceous compound butter, tender vegetables and crispy golden skin.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Resting15 minutes mins
Total Time2 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Keyword: chicken in dutch oven, Dutch oven roast chicken
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 554kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • Microplane
  • Chef Knife

Ingredients

  • 1 whole chicken about 4–5 pounds, patted dry
  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 4 garlic cloves minced
  • ¼ cup fresh herbs rosemary, thyme, oregano tarragon, chopped
  • 1 lemon zested and juiced, save halves for cavity
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 4 carrots cut into ½ inch pieces
  • 1 large onion cut into wedges
  • ¾ to 1 cup water or chicken stock
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425°F.
  • In a small pot, melt the butter and add the minced garlic, chopped herbs, lemon zest and juice, salt, pepper and paprika.
  • Pat the chicken dry with paper towels and transfer to dutch oven, breast side up. Carefully loosen the skin over the breasts with your fingers and spread the butter mixture all over and under the skin.
  • Scatter the vegetables around the chicken. Nestle the leftover lemon halves and any remaining vegetables into the cavity of the chicken.
  • Pour in ¾ to 1 cup water around the chicken, so the vegetables can roast. Tuck the wing tips under so they don’t burn.
  • Transfer to the oven and roast uncovered for about 45-50 minutes.
  • Cover the chicken with foil and continue roasting for another 45 minutes, or until a thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the thigh registers 165°F.
  • Remove the foil and roast for another 10 to 15 minutes to crisp and brown the skin.
  • Once done, let rest for 10 minutes before carving. Serve with the roasted vegetables and spoon the pan juices over the top.

Notes

  • Pat the chicken dry so the skin crisps well.
  • Use whatever herbs or vegetables you have on hand — parsnips, potatoes, or fennel all work nicely.
  • Leftovers: Shred the chicken into salads, tacos, or pasta. Try it in Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad, Mediterranean Crispy Rice Salad, or even soup.

Nutrition

Calories: 554kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 173mg | Sodium: 1344mg | Potassium: 637mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 10993IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

French Onion Stuffed Mushrooms

Sep 5, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Caramelized onion stuffed mushrooms with Gruyere cheese and crispy panko breadcrumbs.

French Onion Stuffed Mushrooms turn everyone’s favorite soup into a decadent bite sized appetizer. Stuffed with caramelized onions and layers of melty Gruyère, and crisp panko topping for the perfect irresistible bite.

French onion stuffed mushrooms with Gruyère and Parmesan cheese and crispy panko topping.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

These French onion stuffed mushrooms take all the flavors of the classic soup and transform them into a decadent bite-sized appetizer.

Sweet, jammy caramelized onions are tucked into tender mushroom caps, topped with nutty Gruyère cheese and finished with a crispy Parmesan-panko topping. Every bite is savory, creamy, and crunchy with just the right balance of richness from the cheese and sweetness from the onions, while the marsala wine cuts through beautifully.

These make a show-stopping addition to any holiday spread. If you already love my boursin stuffed mushrooms, this recipe takes things to the next level with bold, French-inspired flavors.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for French onion stuffed mushrooms, including Gruyere cheese, butter, thyme and Marsala wine.
  • Baby portobello mushrooms (cremini) – Look for medium-sized mushrooms that are large enough to hold the filling. I prefer wiping mushrooms with a damp paper towel instead of rinsing to avoid excess water.
  • Yellow onions – Take the time to caramelize them slowly. Dicing the onions helps the filling fit neatly inside each mushroom cap.
  • Olive oil and butter – The combination adds richness and helps with even browning.
  • Fresh thyme – Classic herb pairing with mushrooms and cheese. If fresh isn’t available, use ½ to ¾ teaspoon dried thyme.
  • Marsala wine – Adds sweetness and depth. You can substitute with sherry, cognac, or red wine.
  • Gruyère cheese – Nutty, melty, and perfect for French onion flavors. Keep it cold before grating to make shredding easier.
  • Panko breadcrumbs – Crisp and light; they toast beautifully. Gluten-free panko also works.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Mushrooms – Use baby bella (cremini) or white button mushrooms. For a larger appetizer, use portobello caps.
  • Cheese – If Gruyère isn’t available, substitute with a good-quality Swiss cheese. Gouda will also work for a creamier, milder flavor.
  • Breadcrumbs – Swap with regular breadcrumbs if you prefer, but panko gives the best crunch. Gluten-free panko works well too.
  • Wine – Marsala is classic, but sherry, cognac, or a dry red wine also pair beautifully. White wine such as Chardonnay can be used for a lighter flavor.
  • Herbs – Fresh thyme is traditional, but parsley, tarragon, or chives would all be delicious variations.

⏲️ Instructions

Caramelizing the Onions

Start sautéing the chopped onions, giving them a mix every so often.

Start pale – Onions soften and turn light yellow after 10–15 minutes.

About halfway through caramelizing the onions, they will deep in color but still need more sautéing until it reaches a deep brown color.

Golden stage – At 30 minutes, they deepen in color and shrink down.

Continue caramelizing the onions past the golden state, so they deepen in color and reduce even more.

Getting jammy – Around 40 minutes, browning starts to develop.

Continue sautéing the onions until the onions caramelize and have a deep amber color.

Fully caramelized – By 50–55 minutes, they’re dark amber and sweet.

Make the Stuffed Mushrooms

Remove the stems from the button mushrooms, place them on a lined baking sheet, stem side up and drizzle with olive oil.

Cleaned mushroom caps – Stems removed, ready for par-baking.

Par-bake the mushrooms and pour out residual liquid, this will ensure the mushrooms dont get soggy.

Drain liquid – After par-baking, pour out any excess moisture.

Fill each mushroom cap with caramelized onions.

Stuff the mushrooms – Add caramelized onion mixture into each mushroom.

Bake the caramelized onion stuffed mushrooms until the cheese melts and the breadcrumb topping is golden and crisp.

Final bake – Top with Gruyère and herbed panko, then bake until golden and bubbly.

How to Make French Onion Stuffed Mushrooms (Video)

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Clean mushrooms gently – Wipe with a damp cloth or paper towel instead of rinsing to prevent sogginess.
  • Pre-bake the mushrooms – Par-baking helps release liquid so the final dish isn’t watery. Drain after baking.
  • Caramelize the onions slowly – Don’t rush this step! Cooking low and slow (45–50 minutes) develops the deep golden color and sweet flavor. Covering the pan with a lid helps trap moisture and prevent burning.
  • Dice onions for easier stuffing – Diced onions fit better into the mushroom caps than sliced onions.
  • Toast the breadcrumbs with oil – Tossing panko with olive oil keeps them from burning and ensures a golden crunch.
  • Make ahead – You can stuff the mushrooms (without topping) up to 2 days in advance. Before serving, add the Gruyère, breadcrumb mixture, and bake until melted.
Stuffed mushrooms with caramelized onions, gruyere cheese and an herby panko topping.

Serving Suggestions

These French onion stuffed mushrooms shine on any appetizer spread:

  • Pair with a simple charcuterie board.
  • Serve alongside goat cheese–stuffed phyllo cups.
  • Add to a platter with steak crostini.
  • Include in a holiday menu with roast Cornish hens.
  • Make them a French-inspired starter before chicken Provençal, coq au vin, or beef bourguignon.

More Mushroom Recipes to Try

  • Steak marsala with mushrooms and herbs.
    Steak Marsala with Mushrooms
  • Roasted Mushroom Crostini with Wine and Herbs
  • Wild Mushroom Risotto
  • Button mushrooms stuffed with boursin cheese make an elegant appetizer.
    Boursin Stuffed Mushrooms

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Caramelized onion stuffed mushrooms with Gruyere cheese and crispy panko breadcrumbs.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

French Onion Stuffed Mushrooms

French onion stuffed mushrooms with caramelized onions, Gruyère, and crispy Parmesan-panko. These are an irresistible bite-sized appetizer!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time50 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: French
Keyword: caramelized onion stuffed mushrooms, French onion stuffed mushrooms
Servings: 12 mushrooms
Calories: 100kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • skillet
  • Chef Knife
  • Silicone Spoon Spatula

Ingredients

  • 1 pint baby portobello mushrooms about 12–14 medium mushrooms
  • 2 medium yellow onions diced
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil divided, plus more as needed
  • 2 garlic cloves minced
  • 4 sprigs fresh thyme leaves removed (plus extra for garnish)
  • Salt and freshly ground black pepper to taste
  • 2 tablespoons marsala wine or sherry, cognac, or red wine
  • ½ cup shredded Gruyère cheese
  • ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Prep the mushrooms: Remove stems, finely chop them, and set aside. Place mushroom caps on the baking sheet, stem side up, drizzle lightly with olive oil, and season with salt and pepper. Bake for 10 minutes. Drain off any liquid and set aside to cool slightly.
  • Caramelize the onions: In a large skillet, heat butter and 1 tablespoon olive oil over medium heat. Add the diced onions, season lightly with salt, and cook slowly for 45 to 50 minutes, stirring occasionally. Keep the skillet covered for part of the cooking time to trap moisture. The onions should become deeply golden and jammy.
  • Add stems and aromatics: Stir in the chopped mushroom stems and cook for 2 minutes until softened. Add the garlic, thyme and saute for another 30 seconds to 1 minute.
  • Deglaze: Carefully pour in the marsala wine and cook until most of the liquid has evaporated and the mixture is rich and concentrated. Taste and adjust seasoning and remove from heat.
  • Make the breadcrumb topping: In a small bowl, combine the panko breadcrumbs, Parmesan and parsley. Drizzle with 1 to 2 tablespoons olive oil and toss until lightly coated.
  • Assemble the mushrooms: Spoon the onion mixture into each mushroom cap. Sprinkle with shredded Gruyère, then top with the breadcrumb-Parmesan mixture.
  • Bake: Return the mushrooms to the oven and bake for 10-12 minutes, until the cheese is melted and the breadcrumbs are golden. For extra crispness, broil for 1 minute at the end, watching closely.
  • Serve: Garnish with fresh thyme leaves and an extra sprinkle of Parmesan. Serve warm.

Video

Notes

  • Clean mushrooms – Wipe with a damp cloth, not water.
  • Par-bake the mushrooms – Helps release liquid; drain before stuffing.
  • Slow-cook onions – Caramelize 45–50 minutes for best flavor.
  • Dice onions – Fits better in mushroom caps.
  • Toast panko – Toss with olive oil for golden crunch.
  • Make ahead – Stuff up to 2 days early; add cheese/topping before baking.

Nutrition

Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 67mg | Potassium: 219mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 134IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 0.4mg

Sabich Sandwich with Fried Eggplant and Tahini

Aug 30, 2025 · 2 Comments

Fried eggplant and other sabich fillings are layered between buttery and flaky puff pastry.

Sabich is a beloved Israeli sandwich with roots in Iraqi-Jewish cuisine, layered with fried eggplant, hard-boiled eggs, fresh salads, and creamy tahini. Here, it's served in golden puff pastry for a fun twist.

These sabich borekas are filled with fried eggplant, chopped salad, sumac onions and hard boiled egg.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Sabich (pronounced "sah-BEEKH") is a popular Middle Eastern street food, often served in pita and filled with all sorts of additions, including fried eggplant, hard-boiled egg, chopped salad, pickles, and creamy tahini sauce.

I gave it a fun twist by swapping the pita for sesame-topped puff pastry triangles, so you get that flaky, buttery crunch with all the bold, saucy and crunchy Sabich fillings tucked inside.

The beauty of Sabich is how versatile it is! Have fun mixing and matching the salads, switch up the sauces, or even roast the eggplant instead of frying. However you layer it, this sandwich is all about texture, color, and bold flavors!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for sabich, including fried eggplant, chopped salad, sliced hard boiled eggs, sumac onions and tahini sauce.
  • Fried Eggplant – I use the same cooking method for my Eggplant Parmesan: dredged, fried until golden, and perfectly crisp. You can make it ahead and reheat in the oven.
  • Chopped Salad – A refreshing mix of tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs that adds brightness to every bite.
  • Sumac Onion Salad – Thinly sliced onions are tossed with bright sumac, lemon, and parsley for a tangy, crunchy layer.
  • Hard-Boiled Eggs – You can buy pre-cooked eggs for convenience, or make your own: place eggs in a saucepan, cover with cold water, bring to a boil, then simmer 9–10 minutes. Cool in ice water before peeling.
  • Tahini Sauce – Creamy, nutty, and easy to make ahead. You can have fun with the flavors and make a lemon herb tahini or add harissa tahini for a spicy twist.
  • Harissa Sauce – A spicy, smoky chili paste that adds a little heat. I have a recipe for homemade harissa in my cookbook, but for store-bought I love Mina Harissa (the spicy version is my go-to).
  • Shredded Cabbage Salad – Crisp and crunchy, it adds a little extra freshness and texture when layered into the sandwich.
  • Puff Pastry – The flaky base that makes this Sabich a little different. I cut the sheets into large triangles, brushed them with egg wash, sprinkled sesame seeds on top, and baked until golden and puffed.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Keep it classic: Use pita bread instead of puff pastry.
  • Eggplant options: Roast or grill the eggplant instead of frying for a lighter flavor.
  • Mix up the salads: Try pickled peppers, tabbouleh, or even roasted vegetables.
  • Swap the protein: Chicken schnitzel or fried zucchini or tomato fritters would also be fantastic.
  • Sauces: Tahini sauce is a must, but zhug, amba (pickled mango sauce), or a good store-bought harissa all work beautifully.

⏲️ Instructions

Slice the eggplant into ½ inch thick rounds.

Slice the Eggplant – Peel in “zebra stripes” so some skin stays on for structure, then slice the eggplant into ½-inch rounds.

Set up a dredging station with flour, whisked eggs and breadcrumbs.

Set Up a Dredging Station – One plate with flour, another with whisked egg, and a third with panko breadcrumbs.

Fry the coated eggplant in hot oil.

Coat the Eggplant – Dredge each slice in flour, then egg, then breadcrumbs and place in hot oil.

Fry the eggplant sliced in oil until golden brown on both sides.

Fry Until Golden – Fry the eggplant until beautifully crisp and golden brown on both sides, then set aside.

Cut the puff pastry into triangles, brush with egg wash and sprinkle of sesame seeds. Bake until golden and puffed up.

Bake the Puff Pastry – Cut the sheet of puff pastry into triangles, brush with egg wash and sprinkle sesame seeds. Bake until puffed and golden.

Sabich boreka with fried eggplant and layered with crunchy Mediterranean salads.

Assemble the Sandwich – Layer fried eggplant, chopped salad, sumac onions, cabbage, egg, tahini, and harissa inside the pastry.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Choosing eggplant: Look for eggplant that has smooth, shiny skin with no bruises, and one that feels heavy for its size. Younger eggplants usually have fewer seeds.
  • Dredging tip: Shake off extra flour/egg/breadcrumbs before frying so the coating stays crisp.
  • Oil temperature: Fry around 360°F. Test with a pinch of breadcrumbs and if it sizzles, it’s ready. Don’t overcrowd the pan or the oil temp will drop.
  • Drain smart: Place the fried eggplant on a wire rack over a sheet pan to keep them crisp (not soggy).
  • Make-ahead: The salads and tahini sauce can be prepped 1–2 days ahead. Eggplant can be fried earlier and reheated in the oven on a rack.
  • Tahini tip: If your sauce thickens, just thin it with water and continue whisking until pourable with a similar texture to honey.
This sabich sandwich is layered with fried eggplant, hard boiled egg, salads, tahini sauce between flaky puff pastry.

Serving Suggestions

This sandwich is basically a full meal in one bite — crispy eggplant, fresh salad, creamy sauce, and flaky pastry. But if you want extras on the side:

  • Serve with hummus or tzatziki for dipping.
  • Olives or quick pickles for snacking
  • Pair with a cold beer, mint tea, or sparkling lemonade for the full street-food vibe.

More Mediterranean Recipes to Try

  • Mediterranean roasted eggplant with creamy tahini, za'atar and crispy chickpeas.
    Mediterranean Roasted Eggplant with Tahini
  • Baked zaatar fries are garnished with fresh thyme and served with a creamy herb tahini sauce.
    Baked Za'atar Fries
  • Feta phyllo rolls with sesame seeds and honey to dip into.
    Phyllo Feta Rolls with Honey
  • Mediterranean charcuterie board with tzatziki, hummus and more.
    Mediterranean Charcuterie Board

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Fried eggplant and other sabich fillings are layered between buttery and flaky puff pastry.
Print Recipe
1 from 1 vote

Sabich Sandwich with Puff Pastry (Eggplant & Tahini)

A playful twist on the classic Sabich sandwich, with crispy eggplant, hard-boiled eggs, salads & tahini layered inside golden, flaky puff pastry
Prep Time45 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Lunch, Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Keyword: sabich recipe, sabich sandwich, sabich with fried eggplant
Servings: 4 sandwiches
Calories: 716kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • skillet
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Food Processor
  • Chef Knife

Ingredients

For the Fried Eggplant

  • 1 medium eggplant peeled in stripes and sliced into ½-inch rounds
  • 1 cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 large eggs whisked
  • 1 ½ cups panko breadcrumbs
  • Neutral oil for frying

For the Puff Pastry

  • flour for dusting
  • 1 sheet puff pastry thawed
  • 1 egg whisked for egg wash
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds

For the Salads & Fillings

  • 4 hard-boiled eggs sliced
  • Fresh chopped salad linked
  • Sumac onion salad linked
  • Shredded cabbage salad recipe below
  • Tahini sauce linked
  • Harissa store-bought or homemade, optional

For the Shredded Cabbage Salad

  • 1 cup red cabbage finely shredded
  • ¼ cup parsley leaves finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • Salt to taste
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Fry the Eggplant

  • Set up a dredging station with three shallow bowls: flour, whisked eggs, and panko breadcrumbs.
  • Lightly season eggplant slices with salt. Dredge each slice in flour, dip in egg, then coat in panko.
  • Heat ½ inch of oil in a skillet over medium-high heat. Fry eggplant slices until golden brown, about 3–4 minutes per side. Drain on paper towels.

Bake the Puff Pastry

  • Preheat oven to 400°F (200°C).
  • Roll out the puff pastry sheet slightly on a lightly floured surface, then cut into 4 large triangles.
  • Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet, brush with egg wash and sprinkle with sesame seeds.Bake for 15–18 minutes, until golden and puffed. Then remove and set aside.

Make the Cabbage Salad

  • Toss shredded cabbage with lemon juice, parsley, olive oil, and a pinch of salt. Use your hands to massage the dressing into the cabbage. Set aside.

Assemble the Sandwich

  • Carefully slice each baked puff pastry triangle open.
  • Spread a layer of harissa on the bottom, then 1-2 slices of fried eggplant, 2-3 hard-boiled egg slices, spoonful of chopped salad, sumac onion salad, and shredded cabbage.
  • Drizzle with tahini sauce and close the sandwich. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Choosing eggplant: Look for eggplant that has smooth, shiny skin with no bruises, and one that feels heavy for its size. Younger eggplants usually have fewer seeds.
  • Dredging tip: Shake off extra flour/egg/breadcrumbs before frying so the coating stays crisp.
  • Oil temperature: Fry around 360°F. Test with a pinch of breadcrumbs and if it sizzles, it’s ready. Don’t overcrowd the pan or the oil temp will drop.
  • Drain smart: Place the fried eggplant on a wire rack over a sheet pan to keep them crisp (not soggy).
  • Make-ahead: The salads and tahini sauce can be prepped 1–2 days ahead. Eggplant can be fried earlier and reheated in the oven on a rack.
  • Tahini tip: If your sauce thickens, just thin it with water and continue whisking until pourable with a similar texture to honey.

Nutrition

Calories: 716kcal | Carbohydrates: 71g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 309mg | Sodium: 435mg | Potassium: 312mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1003IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 130mg | Iron: 6mg

Grilled Lamb Chops with Mint Chimichurri

Aug 21, 2025 · Leave a Comment

Grilled chimichurri lamb chops served over a creamy herb yogurt sauce.

These grilled lamb chops are marinated in an herby chimichurri and grilled until beautifully charred on the outside and tender in the center. Served over a creamy lemony yogurt sauce, the flavors of smoky lamb, bright herbs, and cool yogurt come together for a dinner that’s both elegant and approachable.

Serve the grilled lamb chops with reserved chimichurri on top.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

These grilled lamb chops are marinated in an herbaceous chimichurri made with parsley, mint, garlic, Fresno chili, and a splash of red wine vinegar for brightness. A touch of paprika adds warmth and color before the chops are seared on the grill until perfectly charred on the outside and tender inside.

Unlike a whole rack of lamb (like my Pistachio Crusted Rack of Lamb), this lamb rack is cut into double chops, making them quick to cook and easy to serve. Piled over a cool lemony yogurt sauce and finished with more chimichurri on top, the result is a dish that’s bold, fresh, and perfect for summer grilling or even an indoor grill pan dinner.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for chimichurri marinated lamb chops, with olive oil, garlic, fresh herbs and red wine vinegar.
  • Rack of lamb – Ask the butcher to French the racks (trim the bones) for a nicer presentation, or buy them pre-trimmed. Cutting into double chops helps keep them juicy on the grill.
  • Paprika – Adds color and a subtle smoky-sweet flavor to the marinade. Smoked paprika can also work if you like more depth.
  • Parsley & mint – Fresh, tender herbs give chimichurri its vibrant flavor. Use flat-leaf parsley (not curly) for the best texture.
  • Fresno chili – This chili has a mild-to-medium heat. Look for ones that are firm and glossy. Remove the seeds for less spice.
  • Garlic – Use fresh cloves, not pre-minced, for the brightest flavor in chimichurri.
  • Red wine vinegar – Adds acidity and helps the herbs pop.
  • Greek yogurt – Thick, tangy, and perfect for making a creamy base. Whole milk yogurt gives the richest flavor.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Herbs: Traditional chimichurri uses parsley and oregano. Try parsley + cilantro, or a blend of tender herbs you like.
  • Chili: Swap Fresno for red chili flakes, Aleppo pepper, or pickled peppers like Mama Lil’s.
  • Protein: This marinade is fantastic on steak, chicken thighs, or even roasted mushrooms.
  • Vinegar: Red wine vinegar is classic, but white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar, or lemon juice will all work.

⏲️ Instructions

Add the fresh herbs, chopped garlic and Fresno chile to a bowl with olive oil and a splash of red wine vinegar and mix together for the chimichurri.

Make the Chimichurri. Finely chop parsley, mint, Fresno chili, and garlic and mix with olive oil, red wine vinegar, and salt.

Add a few tablespoons of the chimichurri sauce to the lamb chops with a dash of paprika and rub all over the lamb chops.

Marinate the Lamb. Season lamb chops with salt, pepper, paprika and few spoonfuls of chimichurri. Massage to coat and let marinate.

Grill the lamb chops until charred on the outside and tender in the center.

Grill the Chops. Place the lamb chops on a hot grill and cook a few minutes per side until charred on the outside and tender inside.

Let the grilled lamb chops rest for at least 5 minutes.

Rest Before Serving. Transfer cooked lamb chops to a baking sheet and let rest 5–10 minutes so the juices redistribute.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Marinate: Let the lamb marinate at least 20 minutes, or up to 8 hours for deeper flavor.
  • Bring to room temp: Take the lamb out of the fridge 20–30 minutes before grilling so it cooks evenly.
  • Rest before slicing: Let the lamb rest 5–10 minutes after grilling so the juices redistribute.
  • Make ahead: Chimichurri can be made up to a week in advance and only gets better as the flavors meld.
Grilled lamb chops with chimichurri and served over a creamy yogurt sauce.

Serving Suggestions

Serve the grilled lamb chops alongside a big salad, like Fattoush Salad or a classic Tabbouleh Salad. They’re also delicious with a side of Lemon Orzo Salad or Grilled Potato Salad. For a simple summer spread, add some warm pita and a mezze-style platter with dips like tzatziki, hummus, or baba ganoush.

More Lamb Recipes to Try

  • Lamb shawarma roast served with pickled sumac onions and pita bread.
    Slow Cooked Lamb Shawarma
  • Pistachio crusted lamb chops that are cut with a medium rare center.
    Pistachio Crusted Lamb Chops
  • Turkish Kofta Kebab (Grilled Beef and Lamb Skewers)
  • Turkish lahmacun with lamb and sumac onions.
    Lahmacun (Turkish Pizza)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Grilled chimichurri lamb chops served over a creamy herb yogurt sauce.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Grilled Lamb Chops with Mint Chimichurri & Yogurt Sauce

These grilled lamb chops are marinated in a fresh chimichurri and served over a creamy lemony yogurt sauce.
Prep Time40 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Resting10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American, Mediterranean
Keyword: chimichurri lamb chops, grilled lamb chops
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 665kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls
  • Microplane
  • Chef Knife
  • Charcoal Grill

Ingredients

For the Chimichurri:

  • 1 cup parsley leaves finely chopped
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves finely chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves grated or finely chopped
  • 1 Fresno chili seeded if you want less heat and finely chopped
  • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt or to taste

For the Lamb:

  • 2 racks of lamb about 2-3 pounds, cut into double chops
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • Kosher salt & freshly cracked black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons chimichurri for marinade (recipe below)

For the Yogurt Sauce:

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon dried mint or a handful of fresh, finely chopped
  • Pinch of salt
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the chimichurri: To a bowl, combine the chopped parsley, mint, garlic, Fresno chili, olive oil, red wine vinegar, and salt. Whisk to combine and taste for seasoning.
  • Marinate the lamb: Pat the lamb dry and season with salt, pepper, and paprika. Add 2 heaping tablespoons of chimichurri and rub into the chops. Marinate at least 20 minutes, or up to 8 hours.
  • Grill: Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high. Grill lamb chops 3–4 minutes per side, until charred outside and medium-rare inside. Rest 5–10 minutes.
  • Make the yogurt sauce: Stir together yogurt, lemon, mint, and salt. Spread on the bottom of a platter.
  • Assemble: Place grilled lamb chops over the yogurt. Drizzle with reserved chimichurri. Serve immediately with salad, rice, or grilled vegetables.

Notes

    • Marinate: Let the lamb marinate at least 20 minutes, or up to 8 hours for deeper flavor.
    • Bring to room temp: Take the lamb out of the fridge 20–30 minutes before grilling so it cooks evenly.
    • Rest before slicing: Let the lamb rest 5–10 minutes after grilling so the juices redistribute.
    • Make ahead: Chimichurri can be made up to a week in advance and only gets better as the flavors meld.
    • Serve the grilled lamb chops alongside a big salad, like Fattoush Salad or a classic Tabbouleh Salad. They’re also delicious with a side of Lemon Orzo Salad or Grilled Potato Salad. For a simple summer spread, add some warm pita and a mezze-style platter with dips like tzatziki, hummus, or baba ganoush.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 665kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 62g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 174mg | Sodium: 454mg | Potassium: 939mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1855IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 7mg

Sweet Bourekas with Blueberries, Apples and Honey Tahini

Aug 16, 2025 · 4 Comments

Sweet blueberry borekas with sweet honey tahini glaze.

A sweet twist on a popular Mediterranean treat, these sweet bourekas are filled with tender apples, juicy blueberries and drizzled with a creamy honey tahini glaze. These little pastries are fast, easy and perfectly sweet.

Apple and blueberry borekas drizzled with a sweet honey tahini glaze.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

Bourekas are a beloved pastry across the Mediterranean and Middle East, usually made savory with fillings like cheese, Spinach and Feta Borek, or stuffed with potatoes or eggplant borek. This version flips the tradition and goes sweet, with a mix of blueberries, apples, and cinnamon tucked into buttery puff pastry and finished with a drizzle creamy honey tahini glaze.

Think of them as part hand pie and part turnover. And that tahini drizzle would be fabulous on top of Mediterranean roasted eggplant and roasted Kabocha squash.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for blueberry borekas, with puff pastry, sugar, cinnamon, blueberries and apples.
  • Puff pastry – Store-bought puff pastry keeps things easy. Thaw in the fridge overnight or on the counter for 30 minutes before rolling.
  • Apples – Pink Lady or Honeycrisp add sweetness and hold their shape, while Granny Smith adds tartness.
  • Blueberries – Fresh or frozen both work! If using frozen, add 1 tablespoon cornstarch to absorb extra liquid.
  • Sugar – About ½ cup for the filling, plus more for sprinkling on top.
  • Cinnamon & vanilla – Warm flavors that pair very well with apples.
  • Lemon juice + zest – Brightens the filling and balances the sweetness.
  • Tahini & honey – The base of the glaze. Whisk with warm water until silky and pourable.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Different berries: Swap blueberries for blackberries, raspberries, or chopped strawberries.
  • Change up the fruit: Use pears instead of apples for a fall twist.
  • Add crunch: Sprinkle sesame seeds or chopped pistachios on top before baking.

⏲️ Instructions

Cut the puff pastry into 4 squares.

Cut the pastry. Roll out puff pastry slightly and cut into 4 larger squares (or 9 smaller ones).

Add the blueberry apple filling to the center of the puff pastry square.

Add the filling. Spoon fruit mixture into the center of each square.

Fold the puff pastry over and crimp the edges to seal.

Fold and seal. Fold pastry into triangles and crimp edges with a fork.

Bake the blueberry bourekas until the puff pastry is puffed and golden brown.

Bake until golden. Brush with egg wash, sprinkle with sugar, and bake until puffed and golden brown.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Cut to size: Each puff pastry sheet can be cut into 4 larger squares (easier to fill and seal) or 9 smaller squares (great for bite-sized bourekas).
  • Filling amount: For large bourekas, use about 1 heaping tablespoon of filling. For smaller ones, use less so they don’t burst open.
  • Seal well: Use a fork to crimp the edges and cut a small slit on top of each pastry so steam can escape.
  • If using frozen blueberries: Add 1 tablespoon cornstarch to the filling to absorb excess liquid.
  • Glaze consistency: If leftover honey tahini glaze thickens in the fridge, whisk in a splash of warm water to loosen it.
  • Freezer-friendly: Cool completely, then freeze. Reheat at 350°F until warmed through.
Blueberry and apple hand pies called bourekas.

Serving Suggestions

  • Serve warm with extra honey tahini on the side for dipping.
  • Pair with hot tea or coffee.
  • Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream for dessert.
  • Include in a brunch spread alongside shakshuka, fresh fruit, and yogurt.

More Dessert Recipes to Try

  • Simple summer dessert recipe, charred peaches with creamy and tangy labneh and topped with sweet honey and tart pomegranate seeds.
    Charred Peaches with Vanilla Honey Labneh and Pomegranate
  • dust the blueberry peach clafoutis with powdered sugar and serve by the slice.
    Peach and Blueberry Clafoutis
  • Burnt Almond Torte Cake
  • Recipe for amaretto tiramisu.
    Amaretto Tiramisu
Sweet blueberry borekas with sweet honey tahini glaze.
Print Recipe
5 from 6 votes

Sweet Bourekas with Apples, Blueberries and Honey Tahini

These sweet bourekas are filled with sweet apples and blueberries and drizzled with a creamy and sweet honey tahini sauce. A sweet twist on a popular Mediterranean treat. These little pastries are fast, easy and perfectly sweet.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Thawing (at room temp)30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Brunch, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern, Turkish
Keyword: bourekas, sweet borekas, sweet bourekas
Servings: 8 bourekas/pastries
Calories: 538kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Silpat
  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

For the Bourekas:

  • 2 cups chopped and peeled apples cut into ½-inch cubes
  • 2 cups fresh or frozen blueberries see note if using frozen
  • ½ cup sugar plus more for sprinkling on top
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract or vanilla paste
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 2 sheets puff pastry thawed
  • Flour for rolling out pastry
  • 1 egg whisked with 1 teaspoon water (for egg wash)

For the Honey Tahini Glaze:

  • ½ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • ¼ –½ cup warm water plus more as needed for consistency
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Make the filling: In a medium bowl, combine apples, blueberries, sugar, vanilla, cinnamon, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Toss well and set aside.
  • Prepare the puff pastry: On a lightly floured surface, roll out each sheet just a bit thinner. Cut into either 4 larger squares (8 total) or 9 smaller squares (18 total).
  • Fill the pastries: Place about 1 heaping tablespoon of filling in the center of each square (use less if making smaller bourekas). Fold into a triangle and press the edges with a fork to seal. Cut a small slit on top of each for steam to escape.
  • Bake: Arrange bourekas on the prepared sheet. Brush with egg wash, sprinkle with sugar, and bake for 28–30 minutes, or until puffed and golden brown.
  • Make the glaze: In a small bowl, whisk together tahini, honey, and warm water (start with ¼ cup and add more as needed) until smooth and pourable.
  • Finish: Drizzle the warm bourekas with honey tahini glaze before serving.

Notes

      • Cut to size: Each puff pastry sheet can be cut into 4 larger squares (easier to fill and seal) or 9 smaller squares.
      • Filling amount: For large bourekas, use about 1 heaping tablespoon of filling. For smaller ones, use less so they don’t burst open.
      • If using frozen blueberries: Add 1 tablespoon cornstarch to the filling to absorb excess liquid.
      • Glaze consistency: If leftover honey tahini glaze thickens in the fridge, whisk in a splash of warm water to loosen it.
      • Freezer: Cool completely, then freeze. Reheat at 350°F until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 538kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 167mg | Potassium: 181mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 78IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 3mg
  • Page 1
  • Page 2
  • Page 3
  • Interim pages omitted …
  • Page 15
  • Go to Next Page »

Primary Sidebar

Samantha Ferraro twirling pasta headshot.

Hi, I'm Samantha! I started this blog for my love of world cuisine and cultural flavors! You’ll find everything here from Jewish recipes, Middle Eastern, Italian and more!

More about me →

Weeknight Mediterranean Recipes

  • Roasted chicken with turmeric, fennel and citrus.
    Roast Chicken with Fennel and Citrus
  • Vegetarian pasta fagioli recipe with pasta and beans and topped with grated Parmesan cheese and fresh herbs.
    Vegetarian Pasta Fagioli
  • Fresh herb roasted salmon.
    Herb Crusted Salmon
  • Julia Child's creamy potato leek soup with fresh thyme and olive oil on top.
    Julia Child's Creamy Potato Leek Soup
  • One pot chicken with rice and chickpeas is seasoned with bold spices and layered with fresh lemon slices.
    One Pot Lemon Chicken and Rice with Chickpeas
  • Recipe for zuppa toscana with potatoes, kale and sausage.
    Zuppa Toscana with Sausage
Buy This Book Online
Buy from Amazon Kindle
Buy from IndieBound
Buy from Barnes and Noble
Buy from Amazon
One Pot Mediterranean
Buy now!

Order My Latest Cookbook!

One Pot Mediterranean cookbook cover

Get my most Popular Seafood Recipes, the ones everyone asks for!

Thank you!

You have successfully joined our subscriber list.

Follow on Bloglovin

Footer

↑ back to top

Featured In

About

  • Privacy Policy
  • Accessibility Policy

Newsletter

  • Sign Up! for emails and updates

Contact

  • Contact

As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Copyright © 2025 · Samantha Ferraro · Little Ferraro Kitchen · All Rights Reserved

Rate This Recipe

Your vote:




A rating is required
A name is required
An email is required